<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/Special:Contributions/Marycooch"/>
	<updated>2026-05-16T08:22:38Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Grade_aggregation&amp;diff=148273</id>
		<title>Grade aggregation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Grade_aggregation&amp;diff=148273"/>
		<updated>2024-08-26T10:32:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: include scales in aggregation enabled by default&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
The aggregation dropdown menu lets you choose the aggregation strategy used to calculate the overall grade of a [[Grade categories|grade category]]. The different options are explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: if you have only one aggregation type on your menu, &#039;Natural,&#039; you will need to add others. See the [[Grade aggregation#Available aggregation types menu|Available aggregation types menu]] section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aggregation strategy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All grades are first converted to percentage values (interval from 0 to 1), then aggregated using one of the strategies below and finally converted to the associated category item&#039;s range (between Minimum grade and Maximum grade). In the following, we assume that all Minimum grades are equal to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: An &amp;quot;empty grade&amp;quot; is a missing gradebook entry and could mean different things. For example, it could be a participant who hasn&#039;t yet submitted an assignment, an assignment submission not yet graded by the teacher, or a grade that the gradebook administrator has manually deleted. Caution in interpreting these &amp;quot;empty grades&amp;quot; is thus advised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mean of grades ==&lt;br /&gt;
In yields the sum of all grades divided by the total number of grades.&lt;br /&gt;
For instance: assume a category A (with a Maximum grade equal to 100) includes three items, A1, A2 and A3 (with maximum grades equal to 100, 80 and 10, respectively); if a student scores A1=70, A2=20 and A3=10, then we have the following grade calculation for A: &lt;br /&gt;
    A1 --&amp;gt;70/100=0.7, A2 --&amp;gt; 20/80=0.25, A3 --&amp;gt;10/10=1&lt;br /&gt;
    A: (0.7 + 0.25 + 1.0)/3 = 0.65 --&amp;gt; 65/100 --&amp;gt; 65 (the maximum grade for category A is 100).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Weighted mean ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each grade item can be given a weight to change its importance in the overall mean. In simple terms, the category &amp;quot;total&amp;quot; will be equal to the sum of the scores in each grade item, each multiplied by its grade weight, and that sum is finally divided by the sum of all weights. This is shown in the following example (with the same assumptions as the previous case).&lt;br /&gt;
    A1: 70 out of 100 weight 10, A2: 20 out of 80 weight 5, A3: 10 out of 10 weight 3, category A: maximum grade 100&lt;br /&gt;
    A1 --&amp;gt;70/100=0.7, A2 --&amp;gt; 20/80=0.25, A3 --&amp;gt;10/10=1&lt;br /&gt;
    A: (0.7*10 + 0.25*5 + 1.0*3)/(10 + 5 + 3) = 0.625 --&amp;gt; 62.5/100 --&amp;gt; 62.5 (out of 100)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Simple weighted mean ==&lt;br /&gt;
The difference from the Weighted mean is that the weight of each item is its Maximum grade.&lt;br /&gt;
For instance, using the same assumptions of the first case:&lt;br /&gt;
    A1 --&amp;gt; 70/100, A2 --&amp;gt; 20/80 = 0.25 A3 --&amp;gt; 10/10, category max 100:&lt;br /&gt;
    A: (0.7*100 + 0.25*80 + 1.0*10)/(100 + 80 + 10) = 0.526 --&amp;gt; 52.6/100 --&amp;gt; 52.6 (out of 100)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the &amp;quot;Simple weighted mean&amp;quot; aggregation strategy is used, a grade item can act as Extra credit for the category. This means that the grade item&#039;s maximum grade will not be added to the category total&#039;s maximum grade, but the item&#039;s grade will. For example, if A3 is marked as extra credit in the above calculation:&lt;br /&gt;
    A1 --&amp;gt; 70/100, A2 --&amp;gt; 20/80 = 0.25, A3 (extra credit) 10/10, category max 100:&lt;br /&gt;
   A: (0.7*100 + 0.25*80 + 1.0*10)/(100 + 80) = 0.556 --&amp;gt; 55.6/100 --&amp;gt; 55.6 (out of 100)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mean of grades (with extra credits) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Arithmetic mean with a twist. An old, now unsupported, aggregation strategy is provided here only for backward compatibility with old activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A value greater than 0 treats a grade item&#039;s grades as extra credit during aggregation. The number is a factor by which the grade value will be multiplied before it is added to the sum of all grades, but the item itself will not be counted in the division. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Item 1 is graded 0–100, and its &amp;quot;Extra credit&amp;quot; value is set to 2&lt;br /&gt;
* Item 2 is graded 0–100, and its &amp;quot;Extra credit&amp;quot; value is left at 0&lt;br /&gt;
* Item 3 is graded 0–100, and its &amp;quot;Extra credit&amp;quot; value is left at 0&lt;br /&gt;
* All three items belong to Category 1, which has &amp;quot;Mean of grades (with extra credits)&amp;quot; as its aggregation strategy&lt;br /&gt;
* A student gets graded 20 on Item 1, 40 on Item 2 and 70 on Item 3&lt;br /&gt;
* The student&#039;s total for Category 1 will be 95/100 since 20*2 + (40 + 70)/2 = 95&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Median of grades ==&lt;br /&gt;
The middle value (or the mean of the two middle values) when percentages (the ratios between grades and their maximum values) are arranged in order of value. The advantage over the mean is that it is not affected by outliers (grades which are uncommonly far from the mean).&lt;br /&gt;
    A1 70/100, A2 20/80, A3 10/10, category max 100:&lt;br /&gt;
    A: median(0.7, 0.25, 1.0) --&amp;gt; 0.70 --&amp;gt; 70/100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lowest grade ==&lt;br /&gt;
The result is the smallest grade after [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normalization_(statistics) normalisation]. It is usually used in combination with Aggregate only non-empty grades.&lt;br /&gt;
    A1 70/100, A2 20/80, A3 10/10, category max 100:&lt;br /&gt;
    min(0.7, 0.25, 1.0) = 0.25 --&amp;gt; 25/100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Highest grade ==&lt;br /&gt;
The result is the highest grade after [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normalization_(statistics) normalisation].&lt;br /&gt;
    A1: 70/100, A2; 20/80, A3: 10/10, category max 100:&lt;br /&gt;
    A: max(0.7, 0.25, 1.0) = 1.0 --&amp;gt; 100/100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mode of grades ==&lt;br /&gt;
The mode is the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normalization_(statistics) normalised] grade that occurs the most frequently. It is often used for non-numerical grades. The advantage over the mean is that it is not affected by outliers (grades which are uncommonly far from the mean). However, it loses its meaning once there is more than one most frequently occurring grade (only one is kept) or when all the grades differ.&lt;br /&gt;
    A1 70/100, A2 35/50, A3 20/80, A4 10/10, A5 7/10 category max 100:&lt;br /&gt;
    A: mode(0.7, 0.7, 0.25, 1.0, 0.7) = 0.7 --&amp;gt; 70/100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Natural ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the sum of all grade values, scaled by relative weights. The Maximum grade of the category is the sum of the maximums of all aggregated items. &lt;br /&gt;
    A1 70/100, A2 20/80, A3 10/10, without forcing weights:&lt;br /&gt;
    A: (70 + 20 + 10)/(100 + 80 + 10) --&amp;gt; 100/190&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Scale grades are included in aggregation by default. The admin can change this from Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings &amp;gt; Include scales in aggregation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot; aggregation strategy is used, a grade item can act as Extra credit for the category. This means that the grade item&#039;s maximum grade will not be added to the category total&#039;s maximum grade, but the item&#039;s grade will. Following is an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Item 1 is graded 0-100&lt;br /&gt;
* Item 2 is graded 0-75&lt;br /&gt;
* Item 1 has the &amp;quot;Act as extra credit&amp;quot; checkbox ticked; Item 2 doesn&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
* Both items belong to Category 1, which has &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot; as its aggregation strategy&lt;br /&gt;
* Category 1&#039;s total will be graded 0-75&lt;br /&gt;
* A student gets graded 20 on Item 1 and 70 on Item 2&lt;br /&gt;
* The student&#039;s total for Category 1 will be 75/75 (20+70 = 90 but Item 1 only acts as extra credit, so it brings the total to its maximum)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural aggregation functions as a sum of grades when the weight boxes are left alone. In this situation, the numbers in the weight boxes are informational and represent the effective weights in the sum. Natural aggregation can also function as a mean of grades when the weight boxes are checked and then adjusted so that the weights are equal across a set of items in a category or a set of categories. Items can still be marked as &amp;quot;Extra credit&amp;quot; while using the weights to calculate a mean and contribute to the total for the category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Available aggregation types menu==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:availableaggregationtypes1.png|thumb|Available aggregation types setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the only available aggregation type is &#039;Natural.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To choose any of the other types in a course, other aggregation types must be made available in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Grade category settings &amp;gt; Available aggregation types&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default is &#039;Natural,&#039; but the administrator can specify other types from  &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt;administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; [[Grade category settings]] &amp;gt; Aggregation&#039;&#039;. This default can be set to Forced or Advanced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that reducing the number of aggregation types simply results in disabled aggregation types not appearing in the aggregation type dropdown menu. All existing grade category calculations remain the same, regardless of whether an administrator later disables the aggregation type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:Agregació de les categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Tendance centrale de la catégorie]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Agregación de categoría]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungen zusammenfassen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pt-br:Agregação de Notas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=TinyMCE_editor&amp;diff=148272</id>
		<title>TinyMCE editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=TinyMCE_editor&amp;diff=148272"/>
		<updated>2024-08-25T13:51:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: browser spellcheck&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is TinyMCE?==&lt;br /&gt;
TinyMCE is a powerful rich-text editor that allows users to create formatted content within a user-friendly interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The popular editor is the default editor in new installations of Moodle 4.2 onwards and can be made default in upgraded sites from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, users may select the &#039;&#039;&#039;TinyMCE editor&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;User menu &amp;gt; Preferences &amp;gt; Editor preferences.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/Q-D6nWSusrY | desc = Overview of TinyMCE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spellcheck==&lt;br /&gt;
Although a spellchecker is available with TinyMCE Premium (see below), you can use your browser to check spellings in the standard TinyMCE editor. Depending on your browser you can, for example, type text, right click and select Spellcheck. Incorrect or potentially incorrect spellings will be underlined in red.&lt;br /&gt;
== Tiny Toolbar ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following buttons are available on the toolbar (not all buttons might show in all scenarios:)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:latestTiny.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available buttons are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!#&lt;br /&gt;
!Button&lt;br /&gt;
!#&lt;br /&gt;
!Button&lt;br /&gt;
!#&lt;br /&gt;
!Button&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Undo and Redo&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No auto-link NEW IN 4.3&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Numbered list&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Bold and Italic&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Full screen NEW IN 4.3&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Insert image/modify properties&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Align left&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Toggle second toolbar (if present)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Insert audio/video/modify properties&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Align centre&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Audio|Record audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Align right&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Video|Record video]]&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|L/R and R/L directionality&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Insert H5P / modify H5P properties&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Decrease/increase indent&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Link&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Bullets list&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Unlink&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Some button have pre-requisites to display, for instance, the equation editor button will only show if either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX notation]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;), while the H5P option will only show if the &#039;&#039;tiny/h5p:addembed&#039;&#039; capability has been granted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tiny features ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Insert menu.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
The following features are available from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Insert&#039;&#039;&#039; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert / Edit image ===&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to insert an image is via drag&#039;n&#039;drop. Alternatively, you can use the &#039;&#039;Insert image&#039;&#039; tool, which gives you more control over some image properties:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;: The (internal or external) address of the image. You can either enter a URL manually or select an image from the repository browser, which adds the URL automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;: Unless the image is labelled decorative only, a description must be provided for screenreader users&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Size&#039;&#039;&#039;: Initially, the image&#039;s width and height are set. These can be adjusted to fit your text. When the &#039;&#039;Auto size&#039;&#039; checkbox remains ticked, the image&#039;s width-height ratio stays intact.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039;: Options are &#039;&#039;Top&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Middle&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;Bottom&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Image.png|border|center|frameless|450x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To modify image properties once it has been added to your text, select the image and press the &#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039; button on the mini toolbar that shows up.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert / Edit Link ===&lt;br /&gt;
When inserting or editing a link to another (internal or external) page, you can provide the following settings:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;: The address of the page to navigate to. If left empty, the option &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;top&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;bottom&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; are available&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Text to display&#039;&#039;&#039;: The text that is shown in the text, represented as a link&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: The text shown when hovering over the link&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse repositories&#039;&#039;&#039;: Upload a file to link to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Open link in...&#039;&#039;&#039;: The page can either be opened in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Window&#039;&#039;&#039; or a &#039;&#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Link.png|border|center|frameless|450x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert / Edit Multimedia ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert existing audio or videos clips, the TinyMCE editor supports Moodle standard [[Media embedding|Media embedding interface]]. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Audio &amp;amp; Video.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Record audio and video ===&lt;br /&gt;
TinyMCE lets users record [[audio]] and [[video]] clips which will attach to the text once recorded. Each recording comprises three steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Start recording&#039;&#039;&#039;: when ready, press the &#039;&#039;Start recording&#039;&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Stop recording&#039;&#039;&#039;: when completed, press the &#039;&#039;Stop recording&#039;&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Review recording&#039;&#039;&#039;: you can listen to or watch the recording via the provided controls. Either attach the clip to your text or record it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum length and quality (bitrate) can be [[TinyMCE editor#Tiny Record RTC plugin for Moodle|configured]] at admin level.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert / Edit code sample ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Tiny editor lets you insert and embed syntax color highlighted code snippets into the editable area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Code Sample.png|border|center|frameless|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
While you can select the (programming) language at the top, it doesn&#039;t have any impact on the way the code is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny also supports formatting of code elements (&#039;&#039;Format -&amp;gt; Code&#039;&#039;), which changes the selected text to the internally defined &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;code style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert Table ===&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny comes with comprehensive table management functionality to handle grid-like structures in your text. In addition to the Insert table menu item, an entire main menu has been dedicated to tables.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Table.png|border|center|frameless|450x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once a table has been added, you can customise individual cells, row, columns, and the properties of the entire table. The following self-explanatory menu items are available, all supporting standard HTML table options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Cell&lt;br /&gt;
** Cell properties&lt;br /&gt;
** Merge cells&lt;br /&gt;
** Split cells&lt;br /&gt;
* Row&lt;br /&gt;
** Insert row before&lt;br /&gt;
** Insert row after&lt;br /&gt;
** Delete row&lt;br /&gt;
** Row properties&lt;br /&gt;
** Cut row&lt;br /&gt;
** Copy row&lt;br /&gt;
** Paste row before&lt;br /&gt;
** Paste row after&lt;br /&gt;
* Column&lt;br /&gt;
** Insert column before&lt;br /&gt;
** Insert column after&lt;br /&gt;
** Delete column&lt;br /&gt;
** Cut column&lt;br /&gt;
** Copy column&lt;br /&gt;
** Paste column before&lt;br /&gt;
** Paste column after&lt;br /&gt;
* Table properties&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete table&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Table operations.png|border|center|frameless|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The table editor also shows context-sensitive menus when editing different table elements.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert special character ===&lt;br /&gt;
The special character picker lets you insert letters and symbols (a map of special unicode characters) that are difficult or impossible to access via your keyboard. You can either search by keyword and / or browse categories.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Special character.png|border|center|frameless|450x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert Emojis ===&lt;br /&gt;
Bring a smiley to your content: The emoji picker lets you insert pictograms. You can either search by keyword and / or browse categories.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Emojis.png|border|center|frameless|450x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert HTML elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following 4 HTML elements are supported by TinyMCE via menus:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Insert horizontal line&#039;&#039;&#039;: Adds an HTML line to your text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Insert page break&#039;&#039;&#039;: Adds a page break (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) to your text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Insert nonbreaking space&#039;&#039;&#039;: Add an nonbreaking space (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) at the current cursor location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Insert anchor&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert anchors (sometimes referred to as a bookmarks) to your text. Users will be prompted via a dialog box to enter a string. The string will be inserted into the HTML as an anchor id at the location of the cursor. For example, a user places their cursor at the beginning of &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot; and clicks on the anchor button and enters &amp;quot;start&amp;quot; in the dialog box. The resulting HTML will take the form of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a id=&amp;quot;start&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Moodle&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert date/time ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Insert date/time options lets you easily insert the current date and/or time into the editable area at the cursor insertion point.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - DateTime.png|border|center|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
The available format options depend on the selected language. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Equation editor.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Equation editor ===&lt;br /&gt;
If either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;) then the &#039;&#039;Insert equation&#039;&#039; option is provided in the TinyMCE editor for launching the equation editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internally, the equation editor uses the [https://docs.moodle.org/400/en/TeX_notation_filter TeX notation] which can either be entered manually and / or interactively. The interactive elements are grouped into 4 categories (Operators, Arrows, Greek symbols, and Advanced). The content of each tab can be configured via the [[Equation editor settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the editor, a preview is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure H5P content ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can embed [[H5P]] content via the &#039;&#039;Configure H5P content&#039;&#039; menu as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# Browse the Content bank repository and select an H5P file&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose to either make a copy of the file or create a shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
# Optionally, configure the H5P options (Allow download, Embed button, Copyright button)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Select this file&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Insert H5P&#039;These steps will automatically enter the internal address in the H5P URL field. Alternatively, you can enter any internal or external H5P URL manually.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you create a shortcut to the file, you can edit it in the Content bank and any activities with a link to the file will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
== Tiny tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Tools menu.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
The following tools are available in vie the &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
=== View source code ===&lt;br /&gt;
The source code pop up window displays the code of the page, usually HTML or JS. The code can be modified in plain text; once the window is closed, any changes will be reflected in the WYSIWYG mode.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Source code.png|center|frameless|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word count ===&lt;br /&gt;
The word pop up windows displays the number of words and the number of characters (with and without spaces) of the entire document and the selected text, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Word count.png|border|center|frameless|600x600px|alt=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of words are also shown in the editor&#039;s footer.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Accessibility checker ===&lt;br /&gt;
The automated [[accessibility]] checker checks for some common errors in the text. These are usually elements in the way the text is constructed that can prevent all users from having equal access to information and functionality. The list of problems that the accessibility checker looks for is:&lt;br /&gt;
* Images with missing or empty alt text (unless they have the presentation role)&lt;br /&gt;
* Contrast of font colour and background colour meets [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Content_Accessibility_Guidelines WCAG AA guidelines]&lt;br /&gt;
* Long blocks of text are sufficiently broken up into headings&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables require captions&lt;br /&gt;
* Tables should not contain merged cells as they are difficult to navigate with screen readers&lt;br /&gt;
* All tables should contain row or column headers&lt;br /&gt;
=== Media Manager ===&lt;br /&gt;
The media manager shows all media files that have been embedded in the text. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The top part of the media manager shows the familiar file management element where you can add, download, and delete attached files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Files that have been attached and deleted again are shown at the bottom half of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Media manager.png|border|center|frameless|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Keyboard shortcuts ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following keyboard shortcuts will work in the Tiny text editor in most browsers. Note that for many of these commands to work you need to either click in the text editor or select content in the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor shortcuts ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Windows Command&lt;br /&gt;
!Mac Command&lt;br /&gt;
!Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Shift + f&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + Shift + f&lt;br /&gt;
|Full screen toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + c&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + c&lt;br /&gt;
|Copy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + v&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + v&lt;br /&gt;
|Paste&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + Shift + v&lt;br /&gt;
|Paste without formatting (very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + x&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + x&lt;br /&gt;
|Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + z&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + z&lt;br /&gt;
|Undo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + y&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + y&lt;br /&gt;
|Redo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + a&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + a&lt;br /&gt;
|Select all&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + f&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + f&lt;br /&gt;
|Find and replace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|F3&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Find next&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift + F3&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;Shift + F3&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Find previous&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + b&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + b&lt;br /&gt;
|Bold&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + i&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + i&lt;br /&gt;
|Italics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + u&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + u&lt;br /&gt;
|Underline&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + k&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + k&lt;br /&gt;
|Insert/edit link&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Option + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Move to the end of the next word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Option + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Move to the end of the previous word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift + Option + Right arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the next word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift + Option + Left arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the previous word or letter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Shift + Home&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;⌘ + Shift + Home&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select from the cursor to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Shift + End&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;⌘ + Shift + End&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select from the cursor to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Home&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + Up arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Move to the beginning of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + End&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + Down arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Move to the end of the page&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Backspace&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;⌘ + Backspace&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Delete word or letter to the left&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + Delete&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;⌘ + Delete&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Delete word or letter to the right&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl + P&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ + P&lt;br /&gt;
|Print&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+1&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+1&lt;br /&gt;
|Header 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+2&lt;br /&gt;
|Header 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+3&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+3&lt;br /&gt;
|Header 3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+4&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+4&lt;br /&gt;
|Header 4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+5&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+5&lt;br /&gt;
|Header 5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+6&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+6&lt;br /&gt;
|Header 6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+7&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+7&lt;br /&gt;
|Paragraph&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+8&lt;br /&gt;
|Div&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+Shift+9&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl+Option+9&lt;br /&gt;
|Address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alt+0&lt;br /&gt;
|Option+0&lt;br /&gt;
|Help dialogue (list of shortcuts)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl and +&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ and +&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl and -&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ and -&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom out (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ctrl and 0&lt;br /&gt;
|⌘ and 0&lt;br /&gt;
|Reset zoom (not specific to the editor, but very useful)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
|Double-click&lt;br /&gt;
|Select word&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
|Triple-click&lt;br /&gt;
|Select line&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Keyboard navigation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The sections of the outer UI of the editor - the menubar, toolbar, sidebar and footer - are all keyboard navigable. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Activating keyboard navigation ====&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to activate keyboard navigation:&lt;br /&gt;
* Focus the menubar: Alt + F9 (Windows) or ⌥F9 (MacOS)&lt;br /&gt;
* Focus the toolbar: Alt + F10 (Windows) or ⌥F10 (MacOS)&lt;br /&gt;
* Focus the footer: Alt + F11 (Windows) or ⌥F11 (MacOS)&lt;br /&gt;
Focusing the menubar or toolbar will start keyboard navigation at the first item in the menubar or toolbar, which will be highlighted with a gray background. Focusing the footer will start keyboard navigation at the first item in the element path, which will be highlighted with an underline.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving between UI sections ====&lt;br /&gt;
When keyboard navigation is active, pressing tab will move the focus to the next major section of the UI, where applicable. These sections are:&lt;br /&gt;
* the menubar&lt;br /&gt;
* each group of the toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
* the sidebar&lt;br /&gt;
* the element path in the footer&lt;br /&gt;
* the wordcount toggle button in the footer&lt;br /&gt;
* the branding link in the footer&lt;br /&gt;
* the editor resize handle in the footer&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing shift + tab will move backwards through the same sections, except when moving from the footer to the toolbar. Focusing the element path then pressing shift + tab will move focus to the first toolbar group, not the last.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving within UI sections ====&lt;br /&gt;
Keyboard navigation within UI sections can usually be achieved using the left and right arrow keys. This includes:&lt;br /&gt;
* moving between menus in the menubar&lt;br /&gt;
* moving between buttons in a toolbar group&lt;br /&gt;
* moving between items in the element path&lt;br /&gt;
In all these UI sections, keyboard navigation will cycle within the section. For example, focusing the last button in a toolbar group then pressing right arrow will move focus to the first item in the same toolbar group.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Executing buttons ====&lt;br /&gt;
To execute a button, navigate the selection to the desired button and hit space or enter.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Opening, navigating and closing menus ====&lt;br /&gt;
When focusing a menubar button or a toolbar button with a menu, pressing space, enter or down arrow will open the menu. When the menu opens the first item will be selected. To move up or down the menu, press the up or down arrow key respectively. This is the same for submenus, which can also be opened and closed using the left and right arrow keys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close any active menu, hit the escape key. When a menu is closed the selection will be restored to its previous selection. This also works for closing submenus.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Context toolbars and menus ====&lt;br /&gt;
To focus an open context toolbar such as the table context toolbar, press Ctrl + F9 (Windows) or ⌃F9 (MacOS).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Context toolbar navigation is the same as toolbar navigation, and context menu navigation is the same as standard menu navigation.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dialog navigation ====&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of dialog UIs in TinyMCE: tabbed dialogs and non-tabbed dialogs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a non-tabbed dialog is opened, the first interactive component in the dialog will be focused. Users can navigate between interactive components by pressing tab. This includes any footer buttons. Navigation will cycle back to the first dialog component if tab is pressed while focusing the last component in the dialog. Pressing shift + tab will navigate backwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a tabbed dialog is opened, the first button in the tab menu is focused. Pressing tab will navigate to the first interactive component in that tab, and will cycle through the tab&#039;s components, the footer buttons, then back to the tab button. To switch to another tab, focus the tab button for the current tab, then use the arrow keys to cycle through the tab buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Accessibility shortcuts ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a list of available keyboard shortcuts within the editor user interface.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Windows Command&lt;br /&gt;
!Mac Command&lt;br /&gt;
!Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Enter / Spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
|Enter / Spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
|Execute command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab&lt;br /&gt;
|Focus on next UI Element(such as: Menu bar, Toolbar, Toolbar Group, Status Bar Item)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift+Tab&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift+Tab&lt;br /&gt;
|Focus on previous UI Element(such as: Menu bar, Toolbar, Toolbar Group, Status Bar Item)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Right Arrow / Down Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Right Arrow / Down Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Focus next Control(such as: toolbar button, menu, or menu item)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Left Arrow / Up Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Left Arrow / Up Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Focus previous Control(such as: toolbar button, menu, or menu item)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Down Arrow / Spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
|Down Arrow / Spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
|Open menu or toolbar menu button&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
|Spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
|Open group toolbar button&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Down Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Down Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Open split toolbar button&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift+Enter&lt;br /&gt;
|Shift+Enter&lt;br /&gt;
|Open the popup menu on split toolbar buttons&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Right Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Right Arrow&lt;br /&gt;
|Open submenu&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Left Arrow / Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Left Arrow / Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Close submenu&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Close dialog&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Close menu&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Esc&lt;br /&gt;
|Move focus back to editor body&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Browsers and Screen Readers provide additional shortcuts within the editor context.&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE editor&#039;&#039; you can disable and enable certain settings, for example &#039;&#039;&#039;New in 4.3&#039;&#039;&#039; the Tiny HTML formatter, Tiny no-auto link and access the setting for the paid service TinyMCE Premium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also disable the TinyMCE branding logo which appears at the bottom of the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
====TinyMCE Premium====&lt;br /&gt;
TinyMCE Premium requires a paid subscription. Your API key is available on your [https://www.tiny.cloud/ Tiny Cloud] account page if you have purchased a subscription, or if you are on a free trial. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the API key and enable specific premium plugins at &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE Premium&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The TinyMCE features that may be available to your Moodle site with a Premium subscription are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced Tables&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced Typography&lt;br /&gt;
* Case Change&lt;br /&gt;
* Checklist&lt;br /&gt;
* Enhanced Image Editing&lt;br /&gt;
* Export&lt;br /&gt;
* Footnotes&lt;br /&gt;
* Format Painter&lt;br /&gt;
* Link Checker&lt;br /&gt;
* Page Embed&lt;br /&gt;
* Permanent Pen&lt;br /&gt;
* PowerPaste&lt;br /&gt;
* Spell Checker Pro&lt;br /&gt;
* Spelling Autocorrect&lt;br /&gt;
* Table of Contents&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can learn more about these features on [https://www.tiny.cloud/tinymce/features/#productivity TinyMCE&#039;s website]. Please note that not all plugins listed on TinyMCE&#039;s website are currently available to Moodle users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Equation editor settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - Equation editor settings.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
The equation editor has 4 tabs: Operators, Arrows, Greek symbols, and Advanced. The commands that are available on each tab and their order can be configured in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE editor &amp;gt; Equation editor settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each group, the list of commands is shown in TeX format.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tiny Record RTC plugin for Moodle ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tiny - RTC settings.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny fully supports media recording through. Internally, RecordRTC is utilised, an open source JavaScript library using WebRTC for audio and video recording. To configure its settings, navigate to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE editor &amp;gt; RecordRTC&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following options have an impact on server resources, both in terms of bandwidth and disk usage:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed types&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can specify whether &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio and video&#039;&#039;&#039; recording are supported or &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio only&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Video only&#039;&#039;&#039;. There are two capabilities to control access to the TinyMCE buttons: &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Capabilities/tiny/recordrtc:recordvideo]]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Capabilities/tiny/recordrtc:recordaudio]]&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio bitrate&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Video bitrate&#039;&#039;&#039;: The lower the bitrates, the smaller the file sizes, and vice versa. The default bitrate for recorded audio (128000) should generate files of about 15 KB per minute; the default bitrate for recorded video (2500000) to files of approximately 20 MB per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio time limit in seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Video time limit in seconds&#039;&#039;&#039;: The default time limit is 2 minutes for audio and video recording. Again, the longer the maximum recording length, the bigger the resulting files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recordings are stored in subdirectories of &#039;&#039;$CFG-&amp;gt;dataroot&amp;gt;/filedir&#039;&#039;. Ensure &#039;&#039;post_max_size&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;upload_max_filesize&#039;&#039; are configured in line with your expected maximum recording sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editor TinyMCE]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:TinyMCE-Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Éditeur TinyMCE]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Question_behaviours&amp;diff=148271</id>
		<title>Question behaviours</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Question_behaviours&amp;diff=148271"/>
		<updated>2024-08-25T13:34:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: clarifying manual grading&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How questions behave==&lt;br /&gt;
The following question behaviours are available when [[Quiz settings|creating a quiz]] (also when previewing questions):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Deferred feedback&lt;br /&gt;
:Students must enter an answer to each question and then submit the entire quiz before anything is graded or they get any feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
;Adaptive mode and Adaptive mode (no penalties)&lt;br /&gt;
:Allows students to have multiple attempts at the question before moving on to the next question. This behaviour requires that the &amp;quot;Whether correct&amp;quot; box is ticked under &amp;quot;During the attempt&amp;quot; in the &amp;quot;Review options&amp;quot; section, at a minimum. &lt;br /&gt;
;Manual grading (disabled by default)&lt;br /&gt;
:This is disabled by default because of potential confusion when selecting a question behaviour.  If it is enabled and you select manual grading here, then learners will not get a result until you have manually graded all their questions. Think very carefully about this!&lt;br /&gt;
;Interactive with multiple tries&lt;br /&gt;
:Used for allowing multiple attempts on the same question (perhaps with a grade penalty). Students answer the question and click the &#039;Check&#039; button. If the answer is wrong, the student can click the &#039;Try again&#039; button to try a new response. Importantly, the question definition must contain hints that will be shown after each incorrect attempt, though the hint text can be as minimal as an HTML non-breaking space. Once the student has got the question right, they can no longer change their response. Once the student has got the question wrong too many times, they are just graded wrong (or partially correct) and get shown the feedback. Unless &#039;Allow redo within an attempt&#039; was enabled in the &#039;[[Quiz_settings#Question_behaviour|Question behaviour]]&#039; settings of the quiz, they can no longer change their answer. There can be specific feedback after each attempt the student makes, in addition to overall feedback about incorrect or correct answers and answer choices. The number of tries the student gets is the number of hints in the question definition plus one, with a minimum of three.&lt;br /&gt;
;Immediate feedback&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to interactive mode in that the student can submit their response immediately during the quiz attempt, and get it graded. However, they can only submit one response, they cannot change it later.&lt;br /&gt;
;Deferred feedback or Immediate feedback with Certainty-based marking (CBM)&lt;br /&gt;
:With CBM, the student does not only answer the question, but they also indicate how sure they are they got the question right. The grading is adjusted by the choice of certainty so that students have to reflect honestly on their own level of knowledge in order to get the best mark.&lt;br /&gt;
;Conditional questions&lt;br /&gt;
:If using the Interactive with multiple tries or Immediate Feedback behaviour and with the navigation method set to &#039;Free&#039;, it is possible to make the display of a question dependent on a previous question being answered first.&lt;br /&gt;
:The question editing page will display padlock icons to the right of each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certainty-based marking==&lt;br /&gt;
When a student answers a question they also have to state how sure they are of the answer: not very (less than 67%); fairly (more than 67%) or very (more than 80%). Their grading is then adjusted according to how certain they are, which means that for example if they answered correctly but were only guessing, their mark is adjusted from 1 to 0.33. If they answered wrongly but were very sure, their mark is adjusted from 0 to -2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For detailed information on how CBM works and how students can benefit from it, see [[Using certainty-based marking]].&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm03.png|thumb|correct answer; very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm05.png|thumb|correct answer; fairly sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cmb04.png|thumb|correct answer; not very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm01.png|thumb|wrong answer; very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm99.png|thumb|wrong answer; not very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing question behaviours==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can manage question behaviours available across the site in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Question behaviours &amp;gt; Manage question behaviours&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deferred feedback with explanation==&lt;br /&gt;
[https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qbehaviour_deferredfeedbackexplain Deferred feedback with explanation] is an additional question behaviour, available for Moodle 2.6+,  that is just like deferred feedback, but with an additional input box where students can give a reason why they gave the answer they did. No attempt is made to automatically grade the explanation, nor is it required. &lt;br /&gt;
* It may be used in various ways, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
** The teacher may want to manually edit the grades where the student gave a wrong answer, to give partial credit if the student used the right method or approach.&lt;br /&gt;
** The student might want to explain their thinking, so that later when the results and feedback are revealed, they are reminded of what they were thinking at the time, and so can reflect more deeply.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can use [[Language customization]] to change the default text string &amp;quot;Explain your reasons&amp;quot;  in the file qbehaviour_deferredfeedbackexplain.php to a more specific text such as &amp;quot;Enter justifications below if you want partial credit in numerical problems by showing your steps, ignore otherwise.&amp;quot; as described in https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275752&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Interactive with explanation==&lt;br /&gt;
[[qbehaviour interactiveexplain]] is an additional question behaviour, available for Moodle 3.x,  that is based heavily on Tim Hunt&#039;s deferred feedback with explanation question behaviour. This behaviour is like the interactive with multiple attempts behaviour, but with an additional text box where students can give a reason why they gave the answer they did. No attempt is made to automatically grade the explanation, nor is it required. The code can be found at https://github.com/marcusgreen/moodle-qbehaviour_interactiveexplain &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ucl.ac.uk/lapt/ LAPT: UCL home of Certainty-Based Marking]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=225920 CBM too harsh?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://school.moodledemo.net/mod/quiz/view.php?id=1496  School demo example of a quiz with CBM]  Log into with username &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; and password &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://helderenwijzer.nl/2011/10/certainty-based-marking-in-moodle/ Certainty Based Marking in Moodle] blog post by Isabelle Langeveld&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/mod/oucontent/view.php?id=51788&amp;amp;section=6 Styles of interactive computer marked assessments] from the Open University &lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=313947 This forum thread] about adding an &#039;all or nothing&#039;  behaviour for adaptive and deferred feedback for questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Frageverhalten]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Comportamientos de preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Comportements de question]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=148242</id>
		<title>Quiz settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=148242"/>
		<updated>2024-07-15T10:10:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Site administration settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a new quiz is a two-step process. In the first step, you create the quiz activity and set its options which specify the rules for interacting with the quiz. In the second step you add questions to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
This page describes the options you can set for the quiz activity. The page [[Building Quiz]] describes how to set up the questions for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz administration==&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set up your quiz from &#039;&#039;Add an activity or resource &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;, (or, if you don&#039;t have this link, the dropdown &#039;&#039;Add an activity&amp;gt;Quiz&#039;&#039;) you will get the following settings, (which can also be changed later in the Edit Settings link of the Quiz administration settings block) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
Add a name here (which students will click on to access the quiz) and, if desired, a description of what they must do.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The user&#039;s time-zone - as set in the user profile - only affects how a particular time is displayed to that user. The actual timing for the quiz is not changed by that.}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Open the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts. Before the opening time the quiz will be unavailable to students. They will be able to view the quiz introduction but will not be able to view the questions. Quizzes with start times in the future display both the open and close date for students.&lt;br /&gt;
;Close the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:After the closing time, the students will not be able to start new attempts. Answers that the student submits after the quiz closing date will be saved but they will not be marked. &lt;br /&gt;
: Even after the quiz has closed students will still be able to see the quiz description and review their attempts. What exactly they will see depends on the settings you choose for review options (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the quiz is open by default. In other words, if no opening and closing date is specified, i.e. if the Enable check boxes are not checked, the quiz is accessible at all times. If only an opening date is specified, the quiz is available at all times after this date. If only a closing date is specified, the quiz is available at all times until that date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Time limit&lt;br /&gt;
:By default, quizzes do not have a time limit, which allows students as much time as they need to complete the quiz. If you do specify a time limit, several things are done to try and ensure that quizzes are completed within that time:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quiz timer.png|thumb|Navigation block showing quiz timer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A countdown timer is shown. (&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 4.3:&#039;&#039;&#039; Students can hide this by pressing the Hide button. The remaining time will reappear when there is less than 100 seconds left.)&lt;br /&gt;
# When the timer has run out, the quiz is submitted automatically with whatever answers have been filled in so far &lt;br /&gt;
# If a student manages to cheat and goes over the allotted time, no marks are awarded for any answers entered after the time ran out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;When time expires..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|It is always the case that if the student is actively working on the quiz when the count-down timer reaches zero, then their attempt will be automatically submitted at that moment. This setting only affects what happens if the student starts a timed attempt, then leaves the attempt, and then later time expires.}}&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options as to what will happen when the time limit is up. Choose the one you need from the dropdown menu:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open attempts are submitted automatically (This is the default)&lt;br /&gt;
# There is a grace period when open attempts can be submitted, but no more questions answered&lt;br /&gt;
# Attempts must be submitted before time expires, or they are not counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;There is a grace period...&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then you can check the box to enable the &amp;quot;Submission grace period&amp;quot; and specify a period of time during which learners may still submit the quiz after the time is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can change quiz availability and duration for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections in quiz administration.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example of how timing is handled===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#A student starts a quiz at noon. The quiz has a one-hour time-limit, and a 1-hour delay between attempts. The student gets distracted, and so actually does not submit (using the overdue handling) until 1:30pm. &#039;&#039;They are allowed to start their second attempt at 2. pm&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The quiz count-down timer submits a student&#039;s quiz attempt at the last second when time expires. Because the server is heavily loaded, it takes 30 seconds to process the student&#039;s attempt. &#039;&#039;The submission is accepted nonetheless.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Same situation as above but with a 120-second delay: &#039;&#039;The submission is rejected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The delay is not because of server load but because the student found a way to cheat the timer. &#039;&#039;Moodle cannot know what causes a delay. The behaviour is controlled by the admin setting (quiz | graceperiodmin), 60 seconds by default.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#A student is a member of 3 groups, all of which have different override settings. Which limits will apply to this student? &#039;&#039;If there is any user-specific override, then that is used, and the group overrides for that setting are not used at all. Otherwise, if there are multiple group overrides, the most generous values are used (the earliest open date, the latest close date, the longest time limit, the most number of attempts, and the student can type any of the passwords).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade category&lt;br /&gt;
If you have categories in your gradebook, select the one you wish the quiz to be in here.&lt;br /&gt;
;Attempts allowed&lt;br /&gt;
:Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz. This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of an educational activity rather than simply an assessment.  &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can change the allowed number of attempts for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade to pass&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a passing grade for the quiz. This may be connected with [[Activity completion]] and [[Conditional activities]] such that a student will not be able to access a follow up activity until they have passed the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
;Grading method&lt;br /&gt;
:When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways you can use the grades to calculate the student&#039;s final grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Highest grade - the final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Average grade - the final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* First grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Last grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the most recent attempt only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layout==&lt;br /&gt;
;New page&lt;br /&gt;
:For longer quizzes it makes sense to stretch the quiz over several pages by limiting the number of questions per page. When adding questions to the quiz, page breaks will automatically be inserted according to the setting you choose here. However, you will also be able to move page breaks around by hand later on the editing page.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note that changing this setting has no effect on questions you have already added to the quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. The setting will only apply to questions you add subsequently. To change the page breaks in an existing quiz, you need to go to the quiz editing screen, tick the &#039;Show page breaks&#039; checkbox, then use the repaginate control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have many questions that use many high definition images and the server suffers performance issues, showing only one question per page is easier on the server that showing many (or all) questions in one page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Navigation method (available by clicking &#039;&#039;Show More&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;&#039;Sequential&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;Free&#039;&#039;, if you want to force the student to progress through the questions in order and not go back to a previous question or skip to a later one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question behaviour==&lt;br /&gt;
;How questions behave&lt;br /&gt;
:This is the primary way to control the experience a student has as they interact with each question in the quiz. If you want students to get immediate feedback on their response with a chance to try again, if they get it wrong, then select &#039;Interactive with multiple tries&#039; (and add some hints to your questions and specify a retry penalty if desired). If you want to replicate a traditional exam, select &#039;Deferred feedback&#039;. In other situations, the other options can be useful. For a description of all the behaviours, see [[Question behaviours]].&lt;br /&gt;
;Allow redo within an attempt (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If using Interactive or Immediate feedback mode, enabling this setting means students can try a question again even if they have used up their allowed attempts. This is helpful if they wish to learn from the feedback given at the end of their attempts. Importantly, for students to continue with the same question, the question definition must contain hints. It must also have been added manually into the quiz, rather than randomly (see [[Building Quiz#Adding questions]]). Otherwise, the &#039;redo&#039; will occur with a different question from the one they were working on previously if there are other questions available (such as when the question slot is filled by a random question). A student&#039;s grade for that question slot is based on the most recent question they have started. &#039;&#039;Note: by default students are allowed three tries to answer a question correctly in Interactive mode before the &#039;redo&#039; option becomes available. The number of tries cannot be reduced but it can be increased by adding more hints to the question in the &#039;Multiple tries&#039; section of the question&#039;s configuration page.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
;Each attempt builds on the last (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to Yes, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows the student on the new attempt to concentrate on just those questions that were answered incorrectly on the previous attempt. If this option is chosen then each attempt by a particular student uses the same questions in the same order, independent of randomization settings, and with the same values for questions with random variables. To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select No for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:In other words, if the option is set to Yes, the new attempt is just a continuation of the previous one. Students simply resume their previous attempt with the exact same questions and same values for questions with random variables, and their score as it was. If the option is set to No, the new attempt is an entirely fresh one, with new questions and new values, and the score reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Sometimes the teacher wants one or more students to be able to redo the test from scratch, while other students to be able to just continue where they left off. The option must therefore be set to No for the first student(s) and to Yes for the others. Since the option does not appear in the &amp;quot;User overrides&amp;quot;, the teacher must ensure that it is set to No when the first student(s) launch their new attempt and to Yes when the others launch theirs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Review options==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizreview.png|thumb|600px|Review options expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls what information students will be shown when they review their past attempts at the quiz, and during the attempt in adaptive mode.  It is a matrix with check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The various pieces of information that can be controlled are:&lt;br /&gt;
; The attempt: Will show how the student responded to each question.&lt;br /&gt;
; Whether correct: Displays whether the students response to each question is correct or incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
; Maximum marks: This reveals the maximum mark available for each question. {{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
; Marks:  Reveals the marks awarded to the student and the grade for the quiz and &#039;&#039;is only available when Maximum marks is selected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
; Specific feedback: Will show the feedback for the response to the answer as set when adding the question to the quiz. Each response to a question can have feedback for both correct and incorrect answers.&lt;br /&gt;
; General feedback: Displays the general feedback for the whole question as set when adding the question to the quiz. You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. &lt;br /&gt;
; Right answer:  Reveals the correct answer to each question, whether the student answered correctly or not (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
; Overall feedback: Displays feedback for the entire quiz as set in the quiz settings (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the above items, you can determine the timeframe when the students will see them:&lt;br /&gt;
; During the attempt : is only available when &#039;&#039;‘How questions behave’&#039;&#039; has been set to &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback’&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback with CBM’&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;‘Interactive with multiple tries’&#039;&#039;. If set to one of these options then a &#039;&#039;‘Check’&#039;&#039; button will appear below the answer and when clicked the student will submit that response and then receive immediate feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
; Immediately after the attempt : means within 2 minutes of the student clicking &amp;quot;submit all and finish&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
; Later, while the quiz is still open : means after 2 minutes, but before the close date (if the quiz does not have a close date, this phase never ends).&lt;br /&gt;
; After the quiz is closed : means what it says (you never get here for quizzes without a close date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Checking any of the boxes in the timeframe row, will reveal the test to the student. For example, to allow students to see their quiz immediately after taking it but not later, make sure none of the boxes in &amp;quot;Later&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;After&amp;quot; rows are checked.  The student will be able to see their grade but not get into the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Currently, the Answers display is a bit inconsistent between different question types. For example, the matching question type shows students which of their responses are correct, but does not tell them the right answer for the ones they got wrong. The short answer and multiple choices question types do tell the student what the correct answer is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the capability &#039;View hidden grades&#039; [[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|moodle/grade:viewhidden]] (typically teachers and administrators) are not affected by these settings and will always by able to review all information about a student&#039;s attempt at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your list of review options, you must have &#039;The attempt&#039; (the first option in the lists) selected  before you can enable the options to show &#039;Whether correct&#039;, &#039;Specific feedback&#039;, &#039;General feedback&#039;, and &#039;Right answer&#039;. If you choose not to let the students review the attempt, your only options are to display &#039;Marks&#039; and &#039;Overall feedback&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===How can we show our students only the wrong answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float:left;margin-top:-15px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;margin-top:20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following JavaScript hides the questions that the students answered correctly from the review of their previous attempts. Hence, only questions that the students answered incorrectly or partially correctly are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;script src=&amp;quot;https://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/jquery/3.5.1/jquery.min.js&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    $(document).ready(function() {&lt;br /&gt;
        // On the review page&lt;br /&gt;
        $(&amp;quot;body#page-mod-quiz-review .que&amp;quot;).each(function() {&lt;br /&gt;
            var state = $(this).find(&amp;quot;.state&amp;quot;).text();&lt;br /&gt;
            // Remove correct answers&lt;br /&gt;
            if (state == &#039;Correct&#039;) {&lt;br /&gt;
                $(this).remove();&lt;br /&gt;
            }&lt;br /&gt;
        });&lt;br /&gt;
    });&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&amp;quot;body#page-mod-quiz-review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; identifies the review page,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;$(this).find(&amp;quot;.state&amp;quot;).text()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; captures the status of the question (correct answer or other),&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;if (state == &#039;Correct&#039;) {$(this).remove();}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; suppresses the display of the question if it has been answered correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place this code in different places depending on what you want to get:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Site level. The script affects all quizzes on your Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
:Place the script in &amp;quot;Additional HTML&amp;quot; (Site administration / Appearance / Additional HTML).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Course level. The script affects all quizzes only in a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
:Create an &amp;quot;HTML&amp;quot; block, at the course level, that contains the script. In the block configuration, set &amp;quot;Where this block appears / Display on page types&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Any page&amp;quot;. In the settings of the quizzes, set &amp;quot;Appearance / Show more... / Show blocks during quiz attempts&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;. If you set this setting to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, the script will not be activated. Note that you can hide the block from other pages by setting &amp;quot;On this page / Visible&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; in the block configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Quiz level. The script affects only a specific quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
:Create an &amp;quot;HTML&amp;quot; block, at the quiz level, that contains the script. In the block configuration, set &amp;quot;Where this block appears / Display on page types&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Review quiz attempt page&amp;quot;. In the quiz settings, set &amp;quot;Appearance / Show more... / Show blocks during quiz attempts&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can also place the script [[Text editor#Displaying the HTML code|in the HTML of the question text]] of any question. This will affect all questions that appear on the same page, but &#039;&#039;only on that page&#039;&#039;. For example, if you select &amp;quot;Show one page at a time&amp;quot; on the review page, the questions on a page will be hidden only if one of them contains the script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=408123#p1647459 Reference]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
;Show the user&#039;s picture&lt;br /&gt;
:It is now possible, when displaying the user&#039;s profile picture for proctoring purposes, to choose whether a large image or thumbnail will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in grades&lt;br /&gt;
:This option determines how many digits will be shown after the decimal separator (see  [[dev:Translation langconfig|langconfig]] ) when the grade is displayed. A setting of 0 for example means that the grades are displayed as integers. This setting is only used for the display of grades, not for the display or marking of answers.&lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in question grades&lt;br /&gt;
:By default this is an advanced setting. You need to click Show more ... to reveal it. Lets you have a different display of grades for each question compared to the quiz total. For example you may which to see the total as a whole number, but still show fractional grades for each question.&lt;br /&gt;
;Show blocks during quiz attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:Also an advanced setting by default. You can control whether blocks are shown on the page during quiz attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safe Exam Browser==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safe exam browser|Safe Exam Browser]] is a customised open-source web browser which works perfectly integrated into Moodle quiz. It must be downloaded and installed on the computer that the student uses to attempt the quiz. It restricts student to focus on the quiz. Features include full screen, without web navigation options, shortcut keys including copy and paste are disabled and of course surfing the web during an exam. But Safe exam browser can enable specific software or websites to be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require the use of Safe Exam Browser&lt;br /&gt;
:Activating the general requirement of Safe Exam Browser opens all the settings for using the Safe Exam Browser. You can choose between &#039;&#039;Configure manually&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Use an existing template&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Upload my own config&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Use SEB client config&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
:Please refer to the [[Safe exam browser|Safe exam browser settings page]] for detailed information on the additional settings and for the usage of Safe Exam Browser in general.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extra restrictions on attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
;Require password&lt;br /&gt;
:If you specify a password in here then participants must enter the same password before they are allowed to make an attempt on the quiz. This is useful to give only a selected group of students access to the quiz. In Moodle 3.9 onwards, an admin can set that all quizzes on the site require a password in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
;Require network address&lt;br /&gt;
:You can restrict access for a quiz to particular subnets on the LAN or Internet by specifying a comma-separated list of partial or full IP address numbers. This is especially useful for a proctored (invigilated) quiz, where you want to be sure that only people in a certain room are able to access the quiz. For example: 192.168. , 231.54.211.0/20, 231.3.56.211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There are three types of numbers you can use (you can not use text based domain names like example.com): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Full IP addresses, such as 192.168.10.1 which will match a single computer (or proxy). &lt;br /&gt;
# Partial addresses, such as 192.168 which will match anything starting with those numbers. &lt;br /&gt;
# CIDR notation, such as 231.54.211.0/20 which allows you to specify more detailed subnets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Spaces are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Enforced delay between attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:You can set a time (from seconds to weeks) between the first and second attempt of a quiz. You can also (or alternatively) set a time from seconds to weeks for subsequent attempts after the second attempt. Thus, you might allow a student to take the quiz twice immediately with no delay, but if they want to improve their score with a third attempt, they are forced to wait a week and use the time for extra revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Browser security&lt;br /&gt;
:This is by default an advanced field, visible by clicking &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:The options in this section offer various ways to try to restrict how students may try to &#039;cheat&#039; while attempting a quiz. However, this is not a simple issue, and what in one situation is considered &#039;cheating&#039; may, in another situation, just be effective use of information technology. (For example, the ability to quickly find answers using a search engine.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note also that this is not just at problem of technology with a technical solution. Cheating has been going on since long before computers, and while computers make certain actions, like copy and paste, easier, they also make it easier for teachers to detect cheating - for example using the quiz reports. The options provided here are not fool-proof, and while they do make some forms of cheating harder for students, they also make it more inconvenient for students to attempt the quizzes, and they are not fool-proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Full screen pop-up with some JavaScript security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There is a limit to what the quiz, which runs on a web server, can do to restrict what the student sitting at their computer can do while attempting the quiz. However, this option does what is possible:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:seb24.png|thumb|Student view of quiz question with full screen popup.]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz will only start if the student has a JavaScript-enabled web-browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz appears in a fullscreen popup window that covers all the other windows and has no course navigation controls. (However, it is impossible for a web site to create a browser window that cannot be minimised or moved aside.)&lt;br /&gt;
:* The students are prevented, as far as is possible, from using facilities like copy and paste.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow quiz to be attempted offline using the mobile app&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If the Moodle app is enabled and used, quizzes can attempted offline. Only quizzes with deferred feedback (with or without CBM) can be attempted offline. Students cannot attempt quizzes offline if:&lt;br /&gt;
:the quiz has a time limit;&lt;br /&gt;
:the quiz has a network address;&lt;br /&gt;
:the quiz uses sequential navigation (&#039;&#039;&#039;new in 4.3.1.&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
Overall feedback is shown to a student after they have completed an attempt at the quiz. The text that is shown can depend on the grade the student got. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 100%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 40%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then students who score between 100% and 40% will see the &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot; message, and those who score between 39.99% and 0% will see &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;. That is, the grade boundaries define ranges of grades, and each feedback string is displayed to scores within the appropriate range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade boundaries can be specified either as a percentage, for example &amp;quot;31.41%&amp;quot;, or as a number, for example &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;. If your quiz is out of 10 marks, a grade boundary of 7 means 7/10 or better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the maximum and minimum grade boundaries (100% and 0%) are set automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set as many or as few grade boundaries as you wish. The form allows you up to 5 ranges at first, but you can add more by clicking the &amp;quot;Add 3 fields to form&amp;quot; button underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re getting confusing error messages about a boundary being out of sequence (when it&#039;s obviously *in* sequence), or &amp;quot;boundaries must be between 0% and 100%&amp;quot; (and they are) -- check that the Maximum Grade for this quiz is set to something greater than zero.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to reduce the number of boundaries and feedbacks, you will need to remove all feedbacks and boundaries and then add the reduced amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Outcomes==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if [[Outcomes]] have been enabled by the administrator and are used in the course. See [[Outcomes]] for how to remove an outcome once it has been added to a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is enabled for your site and course, you may also need to explore [[Common module settings]], [[Restrict access]],  [[Activity completion]], [[Tags]] and [[Competencies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group and User overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
Dates, timing and number of allowed attempts may be changed for individual users or groups by following the links &#039;&#039;Group Overrides&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;User Overrides&#039;&#039; in Quiz administration. In situations where two group overrides may apply to a single user, the most lenient date is used. For &amp;quot;Open the quiz&amp;quot; dates, this means the earliest possible date is used, for &amp;quot;Close the quiz&amp;quot; dates, this means that the latest possible date is used. Note also that if there exists a user override for a student, it will always take precedence over any group overrides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular group, click the &amp;quot;add group override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very useful for schools where many students in many different groups wil have to answer the same quiz at different times and students have a tendency to share quiz passwords. You can set a different password and a different time frame for the quiz for each group and thus lower (a little) the risk of students cheating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Anulaciones de varios grupos.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Students MUST be in the correct group for the group override to work as expected. If one student is not in the right group, or if the student is in two or more groups (e.g. the student is also in the group from the previous term), the student will not be able to use the override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sin grupos no funcionan las anulaciones de grupo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular user or users, click the &amp;quot;add user override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration &amp;gt; User overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User overrides are very useful when you need one exception (or a few) for an activity. For example, one student will have a doctor appointment the same day all the group must sit for a summative test; you decide to give the student a chance to take the test one day before all students. Only that particular student will be able to open the quiz that day, using a quiz password that is different from the password that will be used for all the other students the following day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:User overwrride (exception).png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inactive override===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If the quiz is not accessible for the conditions set in an override, a warning message is displayed and the override becomes inactive.}}&lt;br /&gt;
For example, consider a one-hour quiz that will be held on April 14, 2021, between 14:00 and 15:00. You want to set a 15-min extension for a student. In the quiz settings and under &amp;quot;Timing&amp;quot;, you would set &amp;quot;Open the quiz&amp;quot; to 14 April 2021 14 00 and &amp;quot;Close the quiz&amp;quot; to 14 April 2021 15 00, as shown below. Also, in &amp;quot;User overrides&amp;quot;, you would set an override for the student with &amp;quot;Cloze the quiz&amp;quot; set to 14 April 2021 15 15. It all works fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_2312.png|860px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, in the quiz settings and under &amp;quot;Restrict access&amp;quot;, if you have set &amp;quot;Date&amp;quot; restrictions so that the quiz can only be accessed &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; 14 April 2021, 14:00 and &amp;quot;until&amp;quot; 14 April 2021, 15:00, as shown below, a warning will be displayed when you set the override. See below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_2314.png|900px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;border:6px solid #eee;margin-top:10px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[{{ns:file}}:MoodleDocs_20210412_2316.png|800px]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message warns you that although you have extended the &amp;quot;Cloze the quiz&amp;quot; time to 15:15 for the student, the quiz will in fact be inaccessible for him after 15:00 due to the Restrictions in the quiz settings. The only way for the student to access the quiz after 15:00 is to remove the &amp;quot;until&amp;quot; date restriction in the quiz settings or change it to &amp;quot;until&amp;quot; 15:15. (Note that there seems to be a bug that if a &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; date restriction in the quiz settings is not specified, the warning message in the override is not displayed.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should also consider other access restrictions, for example based on group or role assignments, and ensure that the quiz is not hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The time period settings for a quiz (such as time limit, submission grace period, autosave period and so on)  can be set here with a duration of seconds, minutes, hours, days or weeks. These defaults will then be used when new quizzes are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Autosave delay&lt;br /&gt;
:If enabled, student responses will be saved at regular period according to the selection here.This is useful so that students don&#039;t lose work but does increase the load on the server. Setting it to 0 will disable the feature so attempts are not saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using [[Safe Exam Browser]] with the quiz module has two additional settings which may be changed by an administrator.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz &amp;gt; Safe Exam Browser templates&#039;&#039; you can add and manage templates of Safe Exam Browser settings for using in a quiz. This make sense, if you want to make it easier for teachers or if you want to restrict teachers to use Safe Exam Browser only in a specific setting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz &amp;gt; Safe Exam Browser access rule&#039;&#039; you change general settings of the usage of Safe Exam browser like the download link for Safe Exam Browser or if Moodle is allowed to auto configure Safe Exam Browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How questions behave can be configured in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Question behaviours &amp;gt; Manage question behaviours&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How can we show our students only the wrong answers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Competencies&amp;diff=148241</id>
		<title>Competencies</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Competencies&amp;diff=148241"/>
		<updated>2024-07-11T10:57:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What are competencies? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Tracking progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
== What are competencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url =https://youtu.be/n4RnFW0qJBE| desc = Introduction to competencies}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Competencies  describe the level of understanding or proficiency of a learner in certain subject-related skills. Competency-based education (CBE), also known as Competency-based learning or Skills-based learning, refers to systems of assessment and grading where students demonstrate these competencies.  It is possible to create and apply frameworks for evaluating students against competencies in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following videos refer to an outdated version of Moodle but might still have some relevance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Video: [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6zzVgFcQToU| CBE for admins]&lt;br /&gt;
*Video: [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mxBaPnP0j1g| CBE for teachers]&lt;br /&gt;
*Video: [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QF7Bb3mN9tA| CBE for students]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Competencies may be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Competencies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Administrators can then set up competency frameworks and add competencies to them. See [[Competency frameworks]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
*They can then create learning plan templates, add competencies to them and assign learning plans to individual selected students or to whole cohorts. See [[Learning plans]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
*Teachers can add competencies to courses and course activities. They can view a [[Competency breakdown report |competency breakdown report]] from the Administration block and rate competencies.&lt;br /&gt;
*Staff with the relevant capabilities can review student learning plans and view any evidence of prior learning students submit. For more details see [[Competencies FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Students can view their learning plans, upload evidence of prior learning and request reviews. For more details see [[Competencies FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
*For those with the relevant capabilities, a new [[Learning plans block]] is available to be added to the dashboard (for example).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Course competencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A course teacher can list which of the competencies they will be teaching in their course from the competencies link in the navigation drawer (in the Boost theme) or from  &#039;&#039;Navigation &amp;gt; My courses &amp;gt; &#039;Course name&#039; &amp;gt; Competencies.&#039;&#039; in other themes.  A teacher can add or remove competencies from a course here, and see which competencies have been linked to which activities. Clicking on the competency name will take the teacher to a grading page for that competency. &lt;br /&gt;
*A student can also see (but not change) the competencies linked to a course from the navigation drawer (in Boost theme) or from  &#039;&#039;Navigation &amp;gt; My courses &amp;gt; &#039;Course name&#039; &amp;gt; Competencies&#039;&#039; in other themes. They will also see their current rating for each competency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student can filter competencies by activity in order to easily see, for example, which competencies are connected to which particular assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manually rating course competencies===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A course teacher can rate the students against each of the course competencies from &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Reports &amp;gt; Competency breakdown.&#039;&#039; Select a student from the menu &#039;&#039;(1)&#039;&#039; and then click on the desired competency &#039;&#039;(2)&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:compbreakdownreport2.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page for that student will display and you can then change their rating from the dropdown &#039;&#039;(3)&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cbrating.png|thumb|centre|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Competencies  may be filtered by activity in a course, so that, for example.  a teacher can easily see which competencies are connected to a particular assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:37C.png|thumb|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Competencies FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Activity competencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Competencies can be linked to activities. This means you can make sure that you have activities or resources for every competency in the course, by looking at the course competencies page and finding un-mapped competencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to map more than one competency to an activity,  by selecting more than once from the competency drop down when setting up the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use activity completion to automatically complete - or add evidence to course competencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a competency to an activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the settings for the activity&lt;br /&gt;
# In the competencies section, select one or more competencies from the list of course competencies&lt;br /&gt;
# If desired, set what to do upon activity completion - attach evidence, send for review or complete the competency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:activity competencies.png|frame|center|Adding competencies to an activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity will then be shown under the competency on the course competencies page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:course competencies.png|frame|center|Course competency with linked activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example of Activity completion with Activity competencies====&lt;br /&gt;
A student must demonstrate a skill four times before they achieve a competency:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create four activities (such as four assignments) with activity completion set to receiving a grade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set a pass grade from the assignment setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*For assignments 2, 3 and 4, restrict access until the previous assignments have been completed.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the assignment settings for the final assignment, expand &#039;Course competencies&#039;, select the required competency and set &#039;Upon activity completion&#039; to &#039;Complete the competency&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* The student submits work as normal. The teacher grades work as normal. If all four assignments obtain a pass grade, the competency is automatically achieved.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentviewcomp.png|frame|center|Student view of competency achieved.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backing up and restoring competencies==&lt;br /&gt;
Courses with competencies may be backed up to include the competencies. &#039;&#039;However, these will only be restored to a new site if the competencies already exist  with the same ID numbers on the new site.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Statistics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Statistics are built into the various pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student - view competencies in a course:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:course-student.png|thumb|600px|center|Course competency progress for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student - view their own learning plan:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:plan-student.png|thumb|600px|center|Learning plans progress for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teacher - view competencies in a course:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:course-teacher.png|thumb|600px|center|Course competency statistics for a teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manager - view progress for all plans in a template:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:template-manager.png|thumb|600px|center|Learning Plan Template statistics for a manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competencies FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competency reviewer|Competency reviewer role]] - for enabling teachers to review the competencies of students in their class&lt;br /&gt;
* The [https://moodle.org/plugins/report_lpmonitoring Monitoring of Learning Plans] additional plugin. The main goal of this plugin is to facilitate the work of learning plan managers.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=1229 Competencies] Moodle Forum&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Competencies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Competencias]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kompetenzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:scheduledtaskcolours.png&amp;diff=148240</id>
		<title>File:scheduledtaskcolours.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:scheduledtaskcolours.png&amp;diff=148240"/>
		<updated>2024-07-11T08:17:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Scheduled_tasks&amp;diff=148239</id>
		<title>Scheduled tasks</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Scheduled_tasks&amp;diff=148239"/>
		<updated>2024-07-11T08:17:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: colours thanks Howard Miller https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=460147#p1847849&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Server settings}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing scheduled tasks==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can schedule routine tasks very precisely from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Tasks &amp;gt; Scheduled tasks.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you still need to run the [[Cron|cron scripts]] (admin/cli/cron.php or https://yoursite/admin/cron.php) at regular intervals. It is recommended that the cron is run every minute.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:scheduledtasks1.png|thumb|Scheduled tasks]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:scheduledtasks2.png|thumb|Editing a scheduled task]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking the edit icon allows the administrator to specify the minute/hour/day/month or day of the week the task is to be run. It is also possible to reset the task to its default setting or disable it completely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The column &#039;Next run&#039; provides information on whether a plugin or a task is disabled (as well as the date that a task will next run).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Task processing==&lt;br /&gt;
From Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Tasks &amp;gt; Task processing, you can disable/enable cron and view and modify the processing of scheduled and ad hoc tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The length of time to keep polling for additional tasks can be managed from a  &#039;keep alive&#039;setting (with a default value of 3 minutes.)&lt;br /&gt;
==Colours==&lt;br /&gt;
If you see a scheduled task shaded yellow/orange this means the setting has been changed from default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you see a scheduled task shaded red, this means it has reached its maxium retry, ie, it is almost certainly not working.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scheduledtaskcolours.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Format for scheduling tasks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When typing into the fields, the format is the same as for Unix cron. Examples are as follows and are according to which field you are editing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 * is every minute, hour, day, month&lt;br /&gt;
 */2 is every two minutes, every two hours or every second day&lt;br /&gt;
 2-10 is every minute between two and ten past the hour or every hour between 2 and 10 am &lt;br /&gt;
 0 is every Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
 1 is every Monday or every January&lt;br /&gt;
 2,5 is the second and 5th of the month, or February and May, or Tuesday and Friday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default: R means that a random value is picked when saving changes. This helps to distribute tasks more equally instead of running too many of them on the hour, midnight etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fail delay==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re trying to debug a cron task, you may notice the Fail Delay becomes populated with a number. This is the time in seconds the cron will delay running the task. To sidestep this problem for development purposes, take a look at the Scheduled Tasks section here: [[Administration via command line#Scheduled tasks]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Running individual tasks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to run individual scheduled tasks via &#039;Run now&#039; links on the scheduled tasks page, &#039;Allow &#039;Run now&#039; for scheduled tasks&#039; (tool_task | enablerunnow) in Site administration / Security / Site security settings should be enabled AND  &#039;Path to PHP CLI&#039; (pathtophp) in Site administration / Server / System paths should be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:examplescheduledtasks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Ad hoc tasks==&lt;br /&gt;
From Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Tasks &amp;gt; Ad hoc tasks you can see ad hoc tasks grouped by class name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on a component/class name you then have a link to run that particular ad hoc task from the UI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ad hoc tasks can be also be run individually from the command line via admin/cli/adhoc_task.php. Options are:&lt;br /&gt;
*Run by id&lt;br /&gt;
*By class&lt;br /&gt;
*Only failed&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to limit the number of tasks to run, e.g., no more than four at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [MDL-70975] for example CLI commands to run the above ad hoc tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tasks running now==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently running tasks may be viewed from Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Tasks &amp;gt;Tasks running now&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TasksRunningNow.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Launching a task from CLI==&lt;br /&gt;
You can also launch individual task from Command Line Interface (see [[Administration via command line#Scheduled tasks|Administration via command line]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Trabajos agendados]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Geplante Vorgänge]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Tâches programmées]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Manager_role&amp;diff=148232</id>
		<title>Manager role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Manager_role&amp;diff=148232"/>
		<updated>2024-06-27T07:19:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Assigning the role of Manager at the Category level */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manager role abilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default Manager role enables users assigned the role to access courses and modify them, as well as perform certain administrative level tasks related to courses, users, grade settings, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the administrator role, the Manager role is a &#039;real role&#039;, whose capabilities you can edit, but is &#039;&#039;similar&#039;&#039; to Administrator (but much safer to use) due to its broad default powers. As a normal role, like Course Creator or Teacher, while the Manager role has almost very many capabilities by default, you can edit that role if you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(The way permission checks work in the Moodle code is that there is a function called has_capability.  For admins, has_capability will &#039;&#039;&#039;always&#039;&#039;&#039; return true, no matter how the roles are set up. Thus there is no way to edit what permissions an Administrator has.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adopting a best-practice based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Principle_of_least_privilege?layoutType=plain Principle of Least Privilege] suggests that Admins should normally use a Manager role, and not use an Administrator account, similar to the way you are recommended not to log into Linux as root.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Manager role therefore allows a site Administrator to give very powerful roles to others who are assigned a Manager role, but without having to give them a full Administrator role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role of Manager at the Site level==&lt;br /&gt;
You can give someone the Manager role sitewide (to enable them for instance to add new users) by going to &#039;&#039;Site Administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Assign system roles&#039;&#039;, selecting the Manager role and moving over your chosen user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you do so, users in that role will have access to only some of the items in Site administration. They do not have access to areas such as Security, Server, Plugins, Appearance, or Advanced Features, which are reserved for those in the Site administrators group. They have access to most of the tools for User, Course and Grade system settings and tools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifically the Site-wide Manager role can see these in Site administration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    Competencies&lt;br /&gt;
        Migrate frameworks&lt;br /&gt;
        Import competency framework&lt;br /&gt;
        Export competency framework&lt;br /&gt;
        Competency frameworks&lt;br /&gt;
        Learning plan templates&lt;br /&gt;
    Badges&lt;br /&gt;
        Badges settings&lt;br /&gt;
        Manage badges&lt;br /&gt;
        Add a new badge&lt;br /&gt;
    Language&lt;br /&gt;
        Language customisation &lt;br /&gt;
    Appearance&lt;br /&gt;
        Default Dashboard page&lt;br /&gt;
        Default profile page&lt;br /&gt;
        Manage tags&lt;br /&gt;
        User tours&lt;br /&gt;
    Front page&lt;br /&gt;
        Front page settings&lt;br /&gt;
    Users&lt;br /&gt;
        Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
           Browse list of users&lt;br /&gt;
           Bulk user actions&lt;br /&gt;
           Add a new user&lt;br /&gt;
           Cohorts&lt;br /&gt;
           Upload users&lt;br /&gt;
           Upload user pictures&lt;br /&gt;
        Permissions&lt;br /&gt;
           Define roles&lt;br /&gt;
           Assign system role&lt;br /&gt;
           Check system permissions&lt;br /&gt;
           Capability overview&lt;br /&gt;
           Assign user roles to cohort&lt;br /&gt;
    Courses&lt;br /&gt;
        Manage courses and categories&lt;br /&gt;
        Add a category&lt;br /&gt;
        Restore course&lt;br /&gt;
        Backups&lt;br /&gt;
           General backup defaults&lt;br /&gt;
           General import defaults&lt;br /&gt;
           Automated backup setup&lt;br /&gt;
    Grades&lt;br /&gt;
        General settings&lt;br /&gt;
        Grade category settings&lt;br /&gt;
        Grade item settings&lt;br /&gt;
        Scales&lt;br /&gt;
        Outcomes (if enabled on site)&lt;br /&gt;
        Letters&lt;br /&gt;
        Report settings&lt;br /&gt;
           Grader report&lt;br /&gt;
           Grade history&lt;br /&gt;
           Overview report&lt;br /&gt;
           User report&lt;br /&gt;
     Plugins&lt;br /&gt;
        Question types&lt;br /&gt;
           Question preview defaults&lt;br /&gt;
    Reports&lt;br /&gt;
        Comments&lt;br /&gt;
        Backups&lt;br /&gt;
        Logs&lt;br /&gt;
        Live logs&lt;br /&gt;
        Performance overview&lt;br /&gt;
        Security overview&lt;br /&gt;
        Statistics (if enabled on site)&lt;br /&gt;
        Event monitoring rules&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Some of these can further be restricted by editing specific capabilities of the role, e.g., create users, upload users from a file, manual enrolments, managing cohorts, language customisation, etc.,  etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Manager has access to Front page same as with other courses (as it is technically a course).&lt;br /&gt;
* Manager has access to most system level reports but not the Configuration report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Manager has the ability to assign other users as a sitewide Manager &lt;br /&gt;
* Also, a Manager has the ability to edit the role of Manager itself - to disable this, you could prohibit the Create and Manage roles &#039;&#039;moodle/role:manage&#039;&#039; capability&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role of Manager at the Category level==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Manager role can also be assigned in the context Category rather than sitewide. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do this if you want someone to be able to have access to all the courses in a single category and manage them, but do not want them to have access to any of Site administration tools. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From Site administration &amp;gt; Manage courses and categories click the dropdown icon next to the chosen category and then click Permissions. From the dropdown on the next screen select Assign roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Category manager.png|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Managing the category and courses within it ===&lt;br /&gt;
When logged in, a category manager can click the My courses link at the top of their screen and manage to manage their category and courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A category-level manager is so only for the assigned category: to manage more than one category, you will need to assign them that role in each category separately&lt;br /&gt;
* Category-level managers also [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Capabilities/moodle/category:manage manage any sub-categories] beneath the category they are assigned, including create new subcategories and move courses&lt;br /&gt;
* They can create courses in the their assigned categories&lt;br /&gt;
* A category-level manager will not have as many capabilities as a site-level manager, since certain capabilities can only be applied in the system context i.e. via a system role&lt;br /&gt;
* Regarding the [[Capabilities/moodle/user:loginas|capability to login as another user]], for courses within the category that they manage, a category-level manager can only login as  another course participant and browse within that course only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that in some commands are in the Administration block. Managers must Turn editing on in order to have &#039;&#039;Edit category&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Add category&#039;&#039; links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Site administrators]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Gestionnaire]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Manager-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de Mánager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Groups_FAQ&amp;diff=148230</id>
		<title>Groups FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Groups_FAQ&amp;diff=148230"/>
		<updated>2024-06-26T07:43:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* How do I restrict a teacher to view only information about the groups that they are in? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grouping users}}&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the &#039;groups mode&#039; setting?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have several classes/groups working  in a single course with different (or the same) teacher. Groups mode is a way of filtering the students so that work and grades can be accessed separately. See [[Groups]] for more information. There are three different groups modes – No groups, Separate Groups, Visible Groups. In ‘Separate groups’ mode, each group can only see their own group – other groups are invisible. In ‘Visible groups’ mode, each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers are normally able to see other teachers&#039; groups&#039;s activities as well as their own unless the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups]] has been set to &amp;quot;prevent&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the difference between a cohort and a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A group exists only within a course. You might have a class 10B for example which you want to enrol in course 1 and course 2. The group would need to be created in both courses  and its members enrolled separately in both courses. [[Cohorts]] are groups of users created by admin which can then be brought in &amp;quot;en masse&amp;quot; to courses. So if class 10B is created as a cohort by admin, then it can be selected in those courses where enrolment via cohort has been enabled. (For more information on creating and using cohorts, see here: [[Cohorts]]) Once members of a cohort have been added to a course, they can be included in a group, either by using the &amp;quot;auto create groups&amp;quot; feature or by adding the members to an empty or pre-created group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the &#039;force&#039; setting?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If force is set to yes, then all activities are group activities. This overrides any settings for individual activities.  If force is set to no, then activities are only group activities if they have been set to group mode.  In this case, each activity requires to be set to group mode individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I automatically add users to a group at the same time that I enroll them via a csv file?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes.  One of the optional field names that can be uploaded in the flat file is &amp;quot;group1, group2, etc&amp;quot;. The  group  must be associated to the corresponding course and the course short name used in the field course1. If the group doesn&#039;t already exist then Moodle will create the group. Here is an example of a portion of a csv file that would enroll students into a group entitled &#039;Class A&#039; within a course entitled &#039;Astro1&#039;. (Note that you can assign students to groups using this file even if they are already enrolled in Moodle, as you can select to update the user details when uploading the file.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 username, password, firstname, lastname, email, course1, group1,...&lt;br /&gt;
     jdoe, changeme, Jane, Doe, jdoe@email.org, Astro1, Class A,...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I assign a teacher to a group? Can a teacher be in more than one group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a teacher to a group in exactly the same way that you assign a student to a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I restrict a teacher to view only information about the groups that they are in?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Separate Groups mode, the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|moodle/site:accessallgroups]] may be used to restrict access to all groups in a particular context. If this capability is removed from the teacher role (either within a course or globally if appropriate) then they will only see the students they teach when accessing the gradebook for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this for all teachers globally:&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the editing teacher role;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to edit the role&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Show advanced button&lt;br /&gt;
#Type in the search box &#039;&#039;accessallgroups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#When it appears, click &#039;&#039;Prevent&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this within a course:&lt;br /&gt;
#From Course navigation click Participants&lt;br /&gt;
#From the drop down click Permissions&lt;br /&gt;
#Type &#039;&#039;accessallgroups&#039;&#039; into the filter&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bin icon to remove from the editing teacher (Teacher) role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What determines whether students can see a teacher&#039;s profile?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student can see the profile of all teachers that are members of their group or that have edit rights. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I use the same groups for more than one course?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not directly, although there are some workarounds to accomplish this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the [[Import groups]] Import tool to import a file with the groups and settings (though not memberships). &lt;br /&gt;
* Create the groups by import or manually with enrollment keys on them and give the students group enrolment keys to enrol themselves into the right group for each course. &lt;br /&gt;
* Admins and managers can enrol users in bulk via File Upload or [[Cohorts]] to include group membership.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make a template with the enrolments and groups and restore it to a new course with user data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can a student be a member of more than one group? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, a student can be in more than one group.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If one student is in a group, do all students have to be in some group?===&lt;br /&gt;
No, a student does not have to belong to any group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If I have several groups, can I make a specific activity or resource visible to just one of those groups?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can add group restrictions as described in [[Groups]]. ([[Restrict access]] must be enabled.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I have two groups that meet on different days. Can I set up activities for different times for the two groups?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can duplicate the activities and add group and date restrictions as described in [[Groups]].  ([[Restrict access]] must be enabled.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I have one set of groups for Activity A and another set of groups for Activity B?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create two different [[groupings]] (a grouping is a set of groups), and assign different groupings to the two activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to view all the groups in a course as a list to print out?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The groups overview page in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039; provides a table listing groups, group members and a user count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When I try to add a student, they are always added to the first group, whichever group I select?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure that the students name does not include any punctuation. There is also a workaround – give each group a temporary name at the start of the alphabet, put your students in the group and then rename the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I delete a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After clicking, &amp;quot;Groups&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the group that you want to delete&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Delete selected group&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I import a list of students into a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I sort students automatically into groups during enrolment?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can make use of [[enrolment key]]s. Set an enrolment key in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods &amp;gt; Self enrolment&#039;&#039; (to enforce the enrolment key dialogue form when students enrol). That key is only for students who should not be in a group and to keep out any unwanted students. Then in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039; you create your groups and add a different enrolment key for each group. When a student enrols, using an enrolment key that is connected to a certain group, the student will automatically be part of that group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the difference between a group and a grouping?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Groups versus groupings forum post http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=131905. A grouping can be thought of as a category of groups.  A grouping is a meta group.  Student membership to a &amp;quot;grouping&amp;quot; can only happen by their membership to a group that is associated with the grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is an orphan group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An orphan group is a group that does not belong to any grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there any way to enable students to choose a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
There is an add-on activity module &amp;quot;[https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_choicegroup Group Choice]&amp;quot; which will do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view the participants list for just one group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this, you need Groups mode switched ON at course level in Course settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Activity modules and groups==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different activity modules vary as to how they treat groups – some have better support for groups than others! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general if you have questions about how an activity supports groups, you&#039;re advised to post in the forum for the activity module, and not the groups forum. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Which activity modules do NOT support group mode?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All activity modules support the use of group mode apart from Glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens if I switch an activity from being in non-groups mode to being in groups mode?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This depends on the activity module in question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For forums, posts made before the forum is put into groups mode are visible to all students after you have put the forum into group mode. However students cannot reply to these posts if they have no group (i.e. blank). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens if I change the groups for an activity in groups mode e.g. if I move a student from one group to another?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again this depends on the activity module. You may find that grades or activity logs are lost, so check for the specific activity module first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I post a message in a forum that only one group can see?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you click &#039;Add a new topic&#039;, you need to choose the group from the Separate groups drop-down menu at the top left. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===As a teacher I want to put the same post in each group&#039;s forum with students able to reply to that post. How can I do this?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can post the same message once only to all the groups they have access to by ticking the box &#039;Post a copy to all groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Groupings FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=320 Groups forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur les groupes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:FAQ по группам]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Gruppen FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Grupos FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=BigBlueButton&amp;diff=148228</id>
		<title>BigBlueButton</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=BigBlueButton&amp;diff=148228"/>
		<updated>2024-06-23T15:09:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: registering&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the BigBlueButton activity?==&lt;br /&gt;
BigBlueButton lets you create from within Moodle links to real-time on-line classrooms using BigBlueButton, an open source web conferencing system for distance education. You can specify conference times, which are then added to the calendar, and, if allowed in your installation, the sessions may be recorded for viewing later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: For data protection reasons, BigBlueButton is disabled by default. Administrators must enable it from Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Manage activities and then check the box to  accept the data processing agreement. They must then also register on the BBB portal from the Settings page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Free Tier Hosting is currently restricted as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# The maximum length for each session is 60 minutes;&lt;br /&gt;
# The maximum number of concurrent users per session is 25;&lt;br /&gt;
# Recordings expire after seven (7) days and are not downloadable; and&lt;br /&gt;
# Viewers&#039; (student) webcams are only visible to the moderator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/bHawNjjHGdU | desc = How to set up and use BigBlueButton}}&lt;br /&gt;
*In a course, with Edit mode enabled, choose, BigBlueButton from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose a name and description, and, if desired, a welcome message which will appear in the Chat box when participants join the session.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you tick &amp;quot;wait for moderator&amp;quot;, students can only join once someone with the moderator role has entered the room.&lt;br /&gt;
*From the Participants list you can, if needed, give specific roles to specific people, such as a moderator role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled by the administrator from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt; BigBlueButton&amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;, a new section, Guest access,  becomes available to course teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Guest access to a BBB session is not possible if your site forces users to log in (ie, if &#039;forcelogin&#039; is enabled).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From Guest access, you can check the box to allow external users without accounts to join the room. When the box is checked, a meeting link and password become available.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BBBguestlink.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Schedule section you can set a start time and also a time after which student will not be able to enter the room.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Once set up, the activity appears with a link to join when the time is correct. (Before then, or if a moderator is required first. a message appears saying the conference has not yet started.)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:bbb-room.png|alt=]]&lt;br /&gt;
*On entering the room, a message will appear asking if you want to use your microphone or just listen. If you choose microphone you will need to check your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*The moderator can choose whether to allow participants to use webcams and microphones or not.&lt;br /&gt;
*The central area can display presentations, polls, screensharing or an interactive whiteboard.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is also a chat option with public and private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:bbb24 test-moodle.png|center|frameless|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
From Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; BigBlueButton, administrators can set the defaults for BBB sessions and recordings in courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From &#039;&#039;BigBlueButton &amp;gt; Extended capabilities&#039;&#039;, admins can control whether or not participant profile photos are shown in sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
* From &#039;&#039;BigBlueButton &amp;gt; Recordings&#039;&#039;, admins can specify which recording formats (such as presentations) may be viewed by everyone, and which (such as statistics) are restricted to those with the capability [[Capabilities/mod/bigbluebuttonbn:viewallrecordingformats| mod/bigbluebuttonbn:viewallrecordingformats.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:BigBlueButton]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:BigBlueButton]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:BigBlueButton]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:observerhoward.png&amp;diff=148226</id>
		<title>File:observerhoward.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:observerhoward.png&amp;diff=148226"/>
		<updated>2024-06-21T13:31:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Observer_role&amp;diff=148225</id>
		<title>Observer role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Observer_role&amp;diff=148225"/>
		<updated>2024-06-21T13:31:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: creating this page as for 4.4&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Observer role can be given to someone such as an external inspector or moderator who needs access to all courses and grades but without the ability to alter any content. The following steps were provided by Moodler Howard Miller and should be checked for suitability for your own organisation. Note that an alternative possiblity is to duplicate the [[Manager role]] and remove all capabilities you don&#039;t want to allow.)&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating the new role==&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Add a new role&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#If desired, from the Use role preset section, upload the Observer role preset available from the Moodle Forum [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=384769#p1551220 Is there an easy way to add an administrator with no power?] &lt;br /&gt;
#Alternatively,select Teacher (non-editing) as the Role archetype, click Continue and give the role a short and long name e.g. &#039;Observer&#039; or &#039;Inspector&#039;. Optionally, add a description and then tick the &#039;System&#039;, &#039;Category&#039; and &#039;Course&#039; context.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:observerhoward.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Depending on your organisational needs, set the following capabilities to &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*moodle/tag:manage&lt;br /&gt;
*moodle/category:viewhiddencategories&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol/manual:unenrolself&lt;br /&gt;
*mod/lti:requesttooladd&lt;br /&gt;
*moodle/course:view&lt;br /&gt;
*moodle/course:viewhiddensections&lt;br /&gt;
*mod/assign:reviewgrades&lt;br /&gt;
*mod/bigbluebuttonbn:managerecordings&lt;br /&gt;
*moodle/site:accessallgroups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your organisational needs, set the following capabilities to &#039;&#039;&#039;Prevent:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*mod/feedback:receivemail&lt;br /&gt;
*mod/forum:managesubscriptions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Review any other capabilities you might need to Allow or Prevent for your particular organisational needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Create the role.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Payment_gateways&amp;diff=148211</id>
		<title>Payment gateways</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Payment_gateways&amp;diff=148211"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T09:02:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating as per 4.4&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A payment gateway is a technology used by merchants to accept debit or credit card purchases from customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment gateways are used with [[Enrolment on payment]] to provide different payment options when purchasing access to a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;alert alert-info&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Moodle does not store any credit card information. It includes Paypal as standard. Additional payment gateways are available from [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=80 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Payment gateways]  and implement their own methods. You use these plugins at your own risk.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Security notes==&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle is an open-source project, which means that third-party developers can create their own payment plugins to extend Moodle&#039;s functionality to support additional payment methods. The implementation details and data handling practices of these third-party plugins are entirely up to the individual developers, and Moodle itself does not dictate or control how these plugins manage payment data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle only includes the PayPal plugin as standard. When using this plugin, users are redirected to the PayPal website to enter their credit card information. This ensures that the payment data is handled securely by PayPal, and Moodle does not process or transmit any credit card information directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is completed on PayPal’s site, the user is redirected back to Moodle, which then processes the payment status to deliver the purchased service (e.g., course enrolment).&lt;br /&gt;
For any additional payment plugins developed by third parties, Moodle’s core system simply delegates the payment task to these plugins and retrieves the payment status from them. Moodle HQ does not have visibility into the internal workings of these third-party plugins, including how they manage, store, or transmit payment information and therefore cannot provide specific assurances about their compliance with PCI-DSS standards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Payment gateway set-up==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration / Plugins / Payment gateways&#039;&#039; and enable payment gateways as required.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the settings link for each payment gateway to set a surcharge i.e. an additional percentage charged to users who choose to pay using this payment gateway, then save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Payment account set-up==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration / Plugins / Payment gateways&#039;&#039; and click the link &#039;Payment accounts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Create payment account&#039; then enter an account name for identifying it when setting up enrolment on payment, then save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Payment accounts page, click the payment gateway link e.g. PayPal opposite the account name.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a client ID and secret from PayPal, tick the Enable box and save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The payment gateway will then show as enabled for the account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple payment accounts may be set-up as required. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When done, the payment gateway and payment accounts are ready to be used with [[Enrolment on payment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/TWfcZ6Cf3l8 | desc = Payment gateways}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enrolment on payment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Developer documentation [[:dev:Payment API|Payment API]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Passerelles_de_paiement]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Portales de pago]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Zahlungs-Gateways]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Share_to_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148210</id>
		<title>Share to MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Share_to_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148210"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:43:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
If the admin has enabled MoodleNet and the appropriate capabilities are allowed (they are allowed by default), teachers can share activities and/or whole courses to MoodleNet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/DSor_ZfGVSw | desc = Share to MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Share an activity to MoodleNet===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can share a single activity from &#039;&#039;Activity navigation &amp;gt; More &amp;gt; Share to MoodleNet.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:shareactivitymoodlenet.png|thumb|600px|center|Share an activity to MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Share a course to MoodleNet===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can share whole courses from &#039;&#039;Course navigation &amp;gt; More &amp;gt; Share to MoodleNet.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note these courses are backup files, not links, so they don&#039;t update automatically. See the forum discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=454731#p1826909 Autoupdate courses shared to MoodleNet] )&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Share parts of a course to MoodleNet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To share parts of a course:&lt;br /&gt;
#Enable edit mode;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Bulk actions;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the items to be shared;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Share to MoodleNet from the sticky footer at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sharepartscoursemoodlenet.png|thumb|600px|center|Share parts of a course to MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MoodleNet Share progress===&lt;br /&gt;
From Course navigation &amp;gt; More &amp;gt; MoodleNet Share progress, teachers and others with appropriate capabilities can see the &#039;&#039;&#039;send progress&#039;&#039;&#039; of courses and items they have uploaded to MoodleNet in any course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator you can connect to an instance of MoodleNet so that course teachers or others with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:shareactivity| moodlenet:shareactivity]] and/or [[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:sharecourse| moodlenet:sharecourse]] can send course content to the selected MoodleNet site. &lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;, check the box Enable sharing to MoodleNet (outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
# You will then have an extra setting (Enable sharing to MoodleNet (outbound)) from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; MoodleNet settings&#039;&#039;, prompting you to set up a MoodleNet OAuth 2 service.&lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; OAuth2 services&#039;&#039;, click the MoodleNet button and set up your service. See [[OAuth 2 MoodleNet service]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the service is created, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; MoodleNet outbound settings&#039;&#039; and set the OAuth 2 service to the service you just created.&lt;br /&gt;
# When everything is configured correctly, users with the Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:shareactivity and Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:sharecourse will be able to share to MoodleNet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:shareactivity| moodlenet:shareactivity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:sharecourse| moodlenet:sharecourse]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:MoodleNet]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:browseforcontent.png&amp;diff=148209</id>
		<title>File:browseforcontent.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:browseforcontent.png&amp;diff=148209"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:40:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Add_from_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148208</id>
		<title>Add from MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Add_from_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148208"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:39:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator you can connect to an instance of MoodleNet so course teachers can browse for and import content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are enabled by default - disable them if you don&#039;t want your users to use MoodleNet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features,&#039;&#039; make sure Enable MoodleNet integration (inbound) is checked. (It is enabled by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; MoodleNet settings&#039;&#039;, check the settings in the link MoodleNet inbound settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optionally, from Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Activity chooser &amp;gt; Activity chooser settings, select MoodleNet from the footer dropdown. This will then display a link in the [[Activity chooser]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:browseforcontent.png|alt=Browse MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Añadir desde MoodleNet]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=MoodleNet&amp;diff=148207</id>
		<title>MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=MoodleNet&amp;diff=148207"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:38:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
MoodleNet is an open, social, media platform for educators, initially focused on sharing and curating collections of open content. It is a central place from where educators can easily detect quality content to meet the needs of their learners and courses. You can either use MoodleNet Central, the global public MoodleNet, or install your own instance of MoodleNet. If you are a developer interested in installing your own instance of MoodleNet, you can get support in the MoodleNet area of the [https://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=17254 Moodle Research Lab] on Moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/oNgCqKatL4Y | desc = Overview of MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course teachers can add content &#039;&#039;&#039;from&#039;&#039;&#039; MoodleNet and share content &#039;&#039;&#039;to&#039;&#039;&#039; MoodleNet. Admins can enable either or both of these.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add from MoodleNet==&lt;br /&gt;
The setting for allowing course teachers to add/import from MoodleNet is known as &#039;&#039;&#039;MoodleNet inbound settings&#039;&#039;&#039; and are enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page [[Add from MoodleNet]] gives more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Share to MoodleNet==&lt;br /&gt;
The setting for allowing course teachers to share content to MoodleNet is known as &#039;&#039;&#039;MoodleNet outbound setting&#039;&#039;&#039;s and must be enabled by the administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page [[Share to MoodleNet]] gives more information about enabling this feature and how course teachers can use it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:MoodleNet]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:browswforcontent.png&amp;diff=148206</id>
		<title>File:browswforcontent.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:browswforcontent.png&amp;diff=148206"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:36:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Add_from_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148205</id>
		<title>Add from MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Add_from_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148205"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:35:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: creating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator you can connect to an instance of MoodleNet so course teachers can browse for and import content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are enabled by default - disable them if you don&#039;t want your users to use MoodleNet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features,&#039;&#039; make sure Enable MoodleNet integration (inbound) is checked. (It is enabled by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; MoodleNet settings&#039;&#039;, check the settings in the link MoodleNet inbound settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optionally, from Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Activity chooser &amp;gt; Activity chooser settings, select MoodleNet from the footer dropdown. This will then display a link in the [[Activity chooser]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:browswforcontent.png|alt=Browse MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Añadir desde MoodleNet]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Share_to_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148204</id>
		<title>Share to MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Share_to_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148204"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:34:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
MoodleNet is an open, social, media platform for educators, initially focused on sharing and curating collections of open content. It is a central place from where educators can easily detect quality content to meet the needs of their learners and courses. You can either use MoodleNet Central, the global public MoodleNet, or install your own instance of MoodleNet. If you are a developer interested in installing your own instance of MoodleNet, you can get support in the MoodleNet area of the [https://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=17254 Moodle Research Lab] on Moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/oNgCqKatL4Y | desc = Overview of MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course teachers can add content &#039;&#039;&#039;from&#039;&#039;&#039; MoodleNet and share content &#039;&#039;&#039;to&#039;&#039;&#039; MoodleNet. Admins can enable either or both of these.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add from MoodleNet==&lt;br /&gt;
The setting for allowing course teachers to add/import from MoodleNet is known as &#039;&#039;&#039;MoodleNet inbound settings&#039;&#039;&#039; and are enabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page [[Add from MoodleNet]] gives more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Share to MoodleNet==&lt;br /&gt;
The setting for allowing course teachers to share content to MoodleNet is known as &#039;&#039;&#039;MoodleNet outbound setting&#039;&#039;&#039;s and must be enabled by the administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page [[Share to MoodleNet]] gives more information about enabling this feature and how course teachers can use it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:MoodleNet]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Template:MoodleNet&amp;diff=148203</id>
		<title>Template:MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Template:MoodleNet&amp;diff=148203"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:33:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: template&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;navtrail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Main page]] ► [[Managing a Moodle site]] ► [[MoodleNet]] ► [[{{PAGENAME}}]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;sideblock right&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 12em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;header&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[MoodleNet]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add from MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Share to MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;[[Category:Communication]]&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;This template will categorize articles that include it into [[:Category:MoodleNet]].&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Share_to_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148202</id>
		<title>Share to MoodleNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Share_to_MoodleNet&amp;diff=148202"/>
		<updated>2024-06-03T08:32:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
If the admin has enabled MoodleNet and the appropriate capabilities are allowed (they are allowed by default), teachers can share activities and/or whole courses to MoodleNet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/DSor_ZfGVSw | desc = Share to MoodleNet}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Share an activity to MoodleNet===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can share a single activity from &#039;&#039;Activity navigation &amp;gt; More &amp;gt; Share to MoodleNet.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:shareactivitymoodlenet.png|thumb|600px|center|Share an activity to MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Share a course to MoodleNet===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can share whole courses from &#039;&#039;Course navigation &amp;gt; More &amp;gt; Share to MoodleNet.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note these courses are backup files, not links, so they don&#039;t update automatically. See the forum discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=454731#p1826909 Autoupdate courses shared to MoodleNet] )&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Share parts of a course to MoodleNet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To share parts of a course:&lt;br /&gt;
#Enable edit mode;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Bulk actions;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the items to be shared;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Share to MoodleNet from the sticky footer at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sharepartscoursemoodlenet.png|thumb|600px|center|Share parts of a course to MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MoodleNet Share progress===&lt;br /&gt;
From Course navigation &amp;gt; More &amp;gt; MoodleNet Share progress, teachers and others with appropriate capabilities can see the &#039;&#039;&#039;send progress&#039;&#039;&#039; of courses and items they have uploaded to MoodleNet in any course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator you can connect to an instance of MoodleNet so that course teachers or others with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:shareactivity| moodlenet:shareactivity]] and/or [[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:sharecourse| moodlenet:sharecourse]] can send course content to the selected MoodleNet site. &lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;, check the box Enable sharing to MoodleNet (outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
# You will then have an extra setting (Enable sharing to MoodleNet (outbound)) from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; MoodleNet settings&#039;&#039;, prompting you to set up a MoodleNet OAuth 2 service.&lt;br /&gt;
# From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; OAuth2 services&#039;&#039;, click the MoodleNet button and set up your service. See [[OAuth 2 MoodleNet service]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the service is created, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; MoodleNet outbound settings&#039;&#039; and set the OAuth 2 service to the service you just created.&lt;br /&gt;
# When everything is configured correctly, users with the Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:shareactivity and Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:sharecourse will be able to share to MoodleNet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:shareactivity| moodlenet:shareactivity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/moodlenet:sharecourse| moodlenet:sharecourse]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:MoodleNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:MoodleNet]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Notifications&amp;diff=148200</id>
		<title>Notifications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Notifications&amp;diff=148200"/>
		<updated>2024-05-27T15:04:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Messaging}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 4.4:&#039;&#039;&#039; Web notifications are enabled by default for all users in new installations of Moodle LMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Notifications alert teachers, students and other users about events in Moodle such as new forum posts, assignments needing grading or badges awarded.&lt;br /&gt;
*New notifications are highlighted with a number in the notifications menu at the top of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewNotificationsMenu.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking there displays any new notifications, along with the option to mark all as read &#039;&#039;(1 below&#039;&#039;), to go to the notifications preferences page &#039;&#039;(2)&#039;&#039; to change how notifications are received, and &#039;&#039;(3)&#039;&#039; to view all notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewNotificationsFeatures.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking &#039;View full notification&#039; displays the notification in a full list, whereas clicking the main body of the notification will take you to the location in Moodle that the event happened, as in this example, to the assignment grading screen.&lt;br /&gt;
==Receiving notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
* Along with a visible alert to new events in the notifications menu, users can configure how they are notified of new events from their notification preferences page accessed from the user menu or from the gear icon in the notifications menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notifications may be sent via the web (when logged in to Moodle), email and mobile (for [[Moodle Mobile]]-enabled sites).&lt;br /&gt;
* Web offline options are for setting whether a user is notified when they next log in to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Newloginnotifs.png|600px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can set the defaults from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; Messaging &amp;gt; Notification settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three default types of notification plugins: web, email and mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, web and email are both enabled, although email will only work of course if the site has been properly configured to deliver email. Mobile notifications are off by default and need to be configured first.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NotificationPlugins4.png|center|thumb|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Mobile notifications====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:mobilenotifications.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can configure the site to push messages to mobile devices. Moodle pushes messages to a messaging server, which then pushes it to Apple or Google depending on the platform the target device is using (iOS or Android).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Site registration|Registered sites]] can make use of the default messaging server https://messages.moodle.net/ which is maintained by moodle.com. To connect to this, click &#039;Request access key&#039; and then add it to the Airnotifier access key field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may install your own private Air notifier server and use that instead. See https://github.com/dongsheng/airnotifier for details.&lt;br /&gt;
===Default notification preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify the default notification preferences for each type of message in Site administration / Messaging / Notification settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also set to what degree each type of message is enabled, and whether users are able to change these default settings in their profiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039; - Users are permitted or allowed to change the settings. When the user account is created, the new user will inherit the settings the administrator sets here, but will be allowed to change them afterwards in their Messaging settings. Messages will be delivered as the user sets them on their own Messaging settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Locked&#039;&#039; - Users are not permitted or allowed to change these settings. When the user account is created, the new user will inherit the settings the administrator sets here and will never be allowed to change them. Messages will be delivered for all users as you set them on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
====Ordering of messaging settings====&lt;br /&gt;
Because users might have many different messaging options, they are ordered into different components - for example, activities, system, enrolments etc.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification4.png|thumb|600px|center|Part of the Notification preferences screen for a teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== List of notification types====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Module !! Output Name !! Description !! Recipients &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Assignment||Assignment notifications||You have/Student has submitted an [[Assignment activity|assignment]] and Student has received a grade/feedback||Student, Teacher&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Feedback||Feedback notifications||Notices from setting Enable notification of submissions in [[Feedback settings]]||Teacher, Feedback administrator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Feedback||Feedback reminder||[[Feedback activity|Feedback]] non-respondent reminder message|| Student feedback activity non-responders&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Forum||Subscribed forum posts||Default for forum subscription handling||Anyone subscribed to a forum&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Forum||Subscribed forum digests||A digest of forum subjects or subjects and posts if enabled in User - Forum Preferences, Set default for this in [[User default preferences]]|| Authenticated users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lesson||Lesson essay graded notification||Notify students a teacher has graded a Lesson essay question||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Notification of your student&#039;s quiz submissions||Message that student has submitted a quiz||Teacher&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Confirmation of your own quiz submissions||Notice to student that your quiz was successfully submitted||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Warning when your quiz attempt becomes overdue||See [[Quiz settings]]||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Notification that your attempt has been graded||Message that a teacher has posted feedback on an [[Quiz activity]]||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Notices about minor problems||?||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Important errors with the site||Important errors - See also [[Debugging]]||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Available update notifications||Notice of new releases of Moodle code||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Personal messages between users||Using the Messaging interface tool||Authenticated Users &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Backup notifications||Automated backup schedule run completed||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course creation request notification||Notice a course has been requested - See [[Course request]]||Defined in &#039;&#039;Site admin &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course request &amp;gt; Course request notification&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course creation request approval notification ||Notice a requested course has been approved||User who requested the course&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course creation request rejection notification||Notice a requested course has been rejected||User who requested the course&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Badge recipient notifications|| Notify recipient of a badge when it is awarded to them||Any badge recipient (typically Student role)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Badge creator notifications|| Notify creator of a badge when it is awarded to someone||Any badge creator (typically Teacher or Manager role)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Comment posted on a learning plan||?||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Comment posted on a competency ||? ||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Insights generated by prediction models||Notice of users that meet the Analytics criteria, see [[Managing Analytics]]||Teacher&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Message contact requests notification||Notifies users when a non-contact user attempts to send them a message||Authenticated users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Asynchronous backup/restore notifications||Notifies users when a backup/restore is completed message, see [[Course backup]]||Authenticated users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Grade notifications||Message that a teacher has posted feedback on an [[Assignment activity|assignment]]||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course completed||Automatic notification (congratulations note) about completing the course - sent to the student after all the course completion criteria have been achieved||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Antivirus failure notifications.||Warning message for Site Admin, see [[Antivirus plugins]]||Site Administrator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||New login notifications||Warns a user if there was a failed login attempt with their username||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course content changes||Message that alerts students that a course activity was updated - activity title only, does not provide details about what has change)||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Custom report builder schedules||Notification of Report subscriptions, see [[Custom reports]]||usually Teacher or Manager&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Welcome message for new course enrolments||Sends course welcome message to users added by manual or self enrolment||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Manual enrollments||Manual enrolment expiry notifications|| Notice if [[Manual enrolment]] is about to expire||Manual enrolees&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Self enrollments||Self enrolment expiry notifications||Notify users when if [[Self enrolment]] is about to expire|| Enroller only, or Enroller &amp;amp; Enrolled user&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Data privacy||Data request||Message that data review has been requested, see [[Data privacy]]||Privacy Officer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Data privacy||Data request processing results||Message that data review has been received and is processing, see [[Data privacy]]||Authenticated User&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Data privacy||Data requests exceptions notifications||?||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inbound message configuration||Message to confirm that an inbound message came from you||See [[Incoming mail configuration]]||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inbound message configuration||Warning when an inbound message could not be processed||See [[Incoming mail configuration]]||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inbound message configuration||Confirmation that a message was successfully processed||See [[Incoming mail configuration]]||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Event monitoring||Notification of rule subscriptions||Notifications from [[Event monitoring]] rules||Event rule subscribers&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to disable the &#039;New sign in to your account&#039; notification===&lt;br /&gt;
Access Notification settings from the cog icon inside the Notifications icon at the top of your screen to the left of your profile. Disable the setting &#039;New login notifications&#039;. (Note the admin can do this for the site from Site administration &amp;gt; Messaging &amp;gt; Notification settings.) NOTE: disabling this as admin also prevents login information from being sent automatically to new users authorized via external database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Roles and Messaging capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
The following capabilities can be applied as permissions to make custom changes to roles affecting messaging.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/course:bulkmessaging|course:bulkmessaging - Send a message to many people]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/site:readallmessages|site:readallmessages - Read all messages on site]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/site:sendmessage|site:sendmessage - Send messages to any user]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/user:editownmessageprofile|user:editownmessageprofile - Edit own user messaging profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/user:editmessageprofile|user:editmessageprofile - Edit user messaging profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
All email messages and notifications go to the email address set in a user&#039;s profile. The administrator can optionally allow users to choose to have notifications sent to a different email address. This is off by default and can be enabled in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Messaging settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can then enter their alternative email address under Preferences/User account/Notification preferences: Click on the gear icon next to &amp;quot;Email&amp;quot; in the table header and enter the alternative email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The &#039;messagingallowemailoverride&#039; setting does not affect failed log in notifications as they do not go through the messaging system, and will therefore still go to the original email specified.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Site notifications]] for administrators&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Benachrichtigungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Notificaciones]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Notifications&amp;diff=148199</id>
		<title>Notifications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Notifications&amp;diff=148199"/>
		<updated>2024-05-27T15:04:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Messaging}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 4.4:&#039;&#039;&#039; Web notificiations are enabled by default for all users in new installations of Moodle LMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Notifications alert teachers, students and other users about events in Moodle such as new forum posts, assignments needing grading or badges awarded.&lt;br /&gt;
*New notifications are highlighted with a number in the notifications menu at the top of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewNotificationsMenu.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking there displays any new notifications, along with the option to mark all as read &#039;&#039;(1 below&#039;&#039;), to go to the notifications preferences page &#039;&#039;(2)&#039;&#039; to change how notifications are received, and &#039;&#039;(3)&#039;&#039; to view all notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewNotificationsFeatures.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking &#039;View full notification&#039; displays the notification in a full list, whereas clicking the main body of the notification will take you to the location in Moodle that the event happened, as in this example, to the assignment grading screen.&lt;br /&gt;
==Receiving notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
* Along with a visible alert to new events in the notifications menu, users can configure how they are notified of new events from their notification preferences page accessed from the user menu or from the gear icon in the notifications menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notifications may be sent via the web (when logged in to Moodle), email and mobile (for [[Moodle Mobile]]-enabled sites).&lt;br /&gt;
* Web offline options are for setting whether a user is notified when they next log in to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Newloginnotifs.png|600px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can set the defaults from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; Messaging &amp;gt; Notification settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three default types of notification plugins: web, email and mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, web and email are both enabled, although email will only work of course if the site has been properly configured to deliver email. Mobile notifications are off by default and need to be configured first.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NotificationPlugins4.png|center|thumb|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Mobile notifications====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:mobilenotifications.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can configure the site to push messages to mobile devices. Moodle pushes messages to a messaging server, which then pushes it to Apple or Google depending on the platform the target device is using (iOS or Android).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Site registration|Registered sites]] can make use of the default messaging server https://messages.moodle.net/ which is maintained by moodle.com. To connect to this, click &#039;Request access key&#039; and then add it to the Airnotifier access key field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may install your own private Air notifier server and use that instead. See https://github.com/dongsheng/airnotifier for details.&lt;br /&gt;
===Default notification preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify the default notification preferences for each type of message in Site administration / Messaging / Notification settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also set to what degree each type of message is enabled, and whether users are able to change these default settings in their profiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039; - Users are permitted or allowed to change the settings. When the user account is created, the new user will inherit the settings the administrator sets here, but will be allowed to change them afterwards in their Messaging settings. Messages will be delivered as the user sets them on their own Messaging settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Locked&#039;&#039; - Users are not permitted or allowed to change these settings. When the user account is created, the new user will inherit the settings the administrator sets here and will never be allowed to change them. Messages will be delivered for all users as you set them on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
====Ordering of messaging settings====&lt;br /&gt;
Because users might have many different messaging options, they are ordered into different components - for example, activities, system, enrolments etc.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification4.png|thumb|600px|center|Part of the Notification preferences screen for a teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== List of notification types====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Module !! Output Name !! Description !! Recipients &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Assignment||Assignment notifications||You have/Student has submitted an [[Assignment activity|assignment]] and Student has received a grade/feedback||Student, Teacher&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Feedback||Feedback notifications||Notices from setting Enable notification of submissions in [[Feedback settings]]||Teacher, Feedback administrator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Feedback||Feedback reminder||[[Feedback activity|Feedback]] non-respondent reminder message|| Student feedback activity non-responders&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Forum||Subscribed forum posts||Default for forum subscription handling||Anyone subscribed to a forum&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Forum||Subscribed forum digests||A digest of forum subjects or subjects and posts if enabled in User - Forum Preferences, Set default for this in [[User default preferences]]|| Authenticated users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lesson||Lesson essay graded notification||Notify students a teacher has graded a Lesson essay question||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Notification of your student&#039;s quiz submissions||Message that student has submitted a quiz||Teacher&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Confirmation of your own quiz submissions||Notice to student that your quiz was successfully submitted||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Warning when your quiz attempt becomes overdue||See [[Quiz settings]]||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Quiz||Notification that your attempt has been graded||Message that a teacher has posted feedback on an [[Quiz activity]]||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Notices about minor problems||?||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Important errors with the site||Important errors - See also [[Debugging]]||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Available update notifications||Notice of new releases of Moodle code||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Personal messages between users||Using the Messaging interface tool||Authenticated Users &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Backup notifications||Automated backup schedule run completed||Site administrators&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course creation request notification||Notice a course has been requested - See [[Course request]]||Defined in &#039;&#039;Site admin &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course request &amp;gt; Course request notification&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course creation request approval notification ||Notice a requested course has been approved||User who requested the course&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course creation request rejection notification||Notice a requested course has been rejected||User who requested the course&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Badge recipient notifications|| Notify recipient of a badge when it is awarded to them||Any badge recipient (typically Student role)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Badge creator notifications|| Notify creator of a badge when it is awarded to someone||Any badge creator (typically Teacher or Manager role)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Comment posted on a learning plan||?||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Comment posted on a competency ||? ||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Insights generated by prediction models||Notice of users that meet the Analytics criteria, see [[Managing Analytics]]||Teacher&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Message contact requests notification||Notifies users when a non-contact user attempts to send them a message||Authenticated users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Asynchronous backup/restore notifications||Notifies users when a backup/restore is completed message, see [[Course backup]]||Authenticated users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Grade notifications||Message that a teacher has posted feedback on an [[Assignment activity|assignment]]||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course completed||Automatic notification (congratulations note) about completing the course - sent to the student after all the course completion criteria have been achieved||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Antivirus failure notifications.||Warning message for Site Admin, see [[Antivirus plugins]]||Site Administrator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||New login notifications||Warns a user if there was a failed login attempt with their username||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Course content changes||Message that alerts students that a course activity was updated - activity title only, does not provide details about what has change)||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Custom report builder schedules||Notification of Report subscriptions, see [[Custom reports]]||usually Teacher or Manager&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|System||Welcome message for new course enrolments||Sends course welcome message to users added by manual or self enrolment||Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Manual enrollments||Manual enrolment expiry notifications|| Notice if [[Manual enrolment]] is about to expire||Manual enrolees&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Self enrollments||Self enrolment expiry notifications||Notify users when if [[Self enrolment]] is about to expire|| Enroller only, or Enroller &amp;amp; Enrolled user&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Data privacy||Data request||Message that data review has been requested, see [[Data privacy]]||Privacy Officer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Data privacy||Data request processing results||Message that data review has been received and is processing, see [[Data privacy]]||Authenticated User&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Data privacy||Data requests exceptions notifications||?||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inbound message configuration||Message to confirm that an inbound message came from you||See [[Incoming mail configuration]]||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inbound message configuration||Warning when an inbound message could not be processed||See [[Incoming mail configuration]]||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inbound message configuration||Confirmation that a message was successfully processed||See [[Incoming mail configuration]]||Authenticated Users&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Event monitoring||Notification of rule subscriptions||Notifications from [[Event monitoring]] rules||Event rule subscribers&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to disable the &#039;New sign in to your account&#039; notification===&lt;br /&gt;
Access Notification settings from the cog icon inside the Notifications icon at the top of your screen to the left of your profile. Disable the setting &#039;New login notifications&#039;. (Note the admin can do this for the site from Site administration &amp;gt; Messaging &amp;gt; Notification settings.) NOTE: disabling this as admin also prevents login information from being sent automatically to new users authorized via external database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Roles and Messaging capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
The following capabilities can be applied as permissions to make custom changes to roles affecting messaging.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/course:bulkmessaging|course:bulkmessaging - Send a message to many people]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/site:readallmessages|site:readallmessages - Read all messages on site]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/site:sendmessage|site:sendmessage - Send messages to any user]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/user:editownmessageprofile|user:editownmessageprofile - Edit own user messaging profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/user:editmessageprofile|user:editmessageprofile - Edit user messaging profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
All email messages and notifications go to the email address set in a user&#039;s profile. The administrator can optionally allow users to choose to have notifications sent to a different email address. This is off by default and can be enabled in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Messaging settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can then enter their alternative email address under Preferences/User account/Notification preferences: Click on the gear icon next to &amp;quot;Email&amp;quot; in the table header and enter the alternative email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The &#039;messagingallowemailoverride&#039; setting does not affect failed log in notifications as they do not go through the messaging system, and will therefore still go to the original email specified.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Site notifications]] for administrators&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Benachrichtigungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Notificaciones]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Messaging_settings&amp;diff=148198</id>
		<title>Messaging settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Messaging_settings&amp;diff=148198"/>
		<updated>2024-05-27T15:03:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Messaging}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Messaging settings for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can decide how they want to be notified of new messages by editing their messaging preferences page, which they can access either from the Preferences link in the user menu or from the gear icon in the messaging icon at the top of their screen. See [[Messaging]]for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
*Which options they see there depend on what has been enabled by the administrator. For example, the mobile option is only available if the site is enabled for the mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling / disabling messaging site wide==&lt;br /&gt;
The personal messaging system in Moodle is enabled by default. It may be disabled by a site administrator from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Messaging settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; General &amp;gt; Messaging Messaging settings&#039;&#039;, the administrator can &amp;quot;Allow site-wide messaging&amp;quot; (disabled by default). If this setting is enabled, users on the site can view all other users when selecting someone to message and can choose to accept messages from anyone on the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de messagerie]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen für Mitteilungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de mensajería]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Installing_plugins&amp;diff=148195</id>
		<title>Installing plugins</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Installing_plugins&amp;diff=148195"/>
		<updated>2024-05-21T06:50:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Why install additional plugins?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plugins enable you to add additional features and functionality to Moodle, such as new activities, new quiz question types, new reports, integrations with other systems and many more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain hosting solutions, such as [https://moodle.com/cloud/ MoodleCloud], prevent plugins being installed from within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing the best plugins for your site==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: It is recommended that you proceed with caution and always try installing these plugins on a test server before installing them in a production server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory] you can sort plugins by, for example, [https://moodle.org/plugins/index.php/?q=sort-by:sites plugins used by the largest number of sites], or [https://moodle.org/plugins/index.php/?q=sort-by:release recently updated plugins]. Use the &#039;Sort by&#039; to help you identify reliable plugins. (Note that the number of downloads isn&#039;t necessarily a good indicator of a plugin&#039;s quality, as this can be falsified.)&lt;br /&gt;
* When viewing plugins, scroll down to its Awards section. Does it have the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=award&amp;amp;id=11 Privacy friendly award]? Does it have the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=award&amp;amp;id=6 Mobile app award?]&lt;br /&gt;
* You can test and try more than 50 of the most popular Moodle plugins at [http://plugins.moodlebites.com plugins.moodlebites.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Plugins for school teaching===&lt;br /&gt;
For the various school environments (ages 4 - 18 ) consider the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_attendance Attendance]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_checklist Checklist]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/atto_chemistry Chemistry editor]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_choicegroup Group choice]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/block_xp Level up!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/mod_quizgame Quizventure]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/tinymce_wordcount Word count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Plugins for university teaching===&lt;br /&gt;
For universities, there is a [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Tertiary_education#Moodle_plugins_by.2Ffor_Universities list of plugins by/for Universities], and a [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Tertiary_education#Discipline-specific_plugins link to discipline-specific plugins], which might be worth considering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Considerations for production sites (skip if you&#039;re just moodling) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VERY IMPORTANT&#039;&#039;&#039; Warning: Please be aware that some plugins have not been reviewed, and the quality and/or suitability for your Moodle site has not been checked. Please be careful. It may not do what you expect, it may have serious security issues or it may even not work at all. This is however improving over time with the evolving new plugins directory system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a large site for production purposes consider if you &#039;&#039;&#039;really&#039;&#039;&#039; need the plugin? More functionality means more things to support, more things to (potentially) go wrong and more things to worry about at upgrade time. &lt;br /&gt;
* Is the plugin supported and maintained? If something goes wrong can you get support? Will bugs be fixed?&lt;br /&gt;
* If the plugin does not work in a future version of Moodle, what will you do about it?&lt;br /&gt;
* Beware of &#039;&#039;patches&#039;&#039; ([https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=38 Moodle Plugins Directory Other category]) ! If a plugin modifies or replaces core files then be very careful. It can only be guaranteed to work with the exact build (version) of Moodle it was created for and is highly unlikely to survive a Moodle upgrade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Look at [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=340821#p1373707 this] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=346296 also this] forum threads of users worried about installing a plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing a plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/vBAbahDUUuE | desc = Installing plugins from admin interface}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install a plugin, its source code must be put (deployed) into the appropriate location inside the Moodle installation directory and the main administration page &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; must be visited. There are three ways how the plugin code can be deployed into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plugin code may be deployed from within Moodle, either directly from the Moodle plugins directory or by uploading a ZIP file. The web server process has to have write access to the plugin type folder where the new plugin is to be installed in order to use either of these methods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, a plugin may be deployed manually at the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Whenever you install or download a plugin from the Moodle plugins directory, it is extremely important that you have correctly chosen your [[Moodle version]]. If you mistakenly download and install the wrong version of a plugin for your Moodle server, this may lead to some serious problems, even freezing of the Moodle site.}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing directly from the Moodle plugins directory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Login as an admin and go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Install plugins&#039;&#039;. (If you can&#039;t find this location, then plugin installation is prevented on your site.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Install plugins from Moodle plugins directory&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your current [[Moodle version]], then search for a plugin with an Install button, click the Install button, then click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# Confirm the installation request&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the plugin validation report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing via uploaded ZIP file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory], select your current [[Moodle version]], then choose a plugin with a Download button and download the ZIP file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Login to your Moodle site as an admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Install plugins&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the ZIP file. You should only be prompted to add extra details (in the Show more section) if your plugin is not automatically detected.&lt;br /&gt;
# If your target directory is not writeable, you will see a warning message.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the plugin validation report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:plugin1.png|thumb|Install plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:add-on package validation.png|thumb|Plugin package validation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing manually at the server===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can&#039;t deploy the plugin code via the administration web interface, you have to copy it to the server file system manually (e.g. if the web server process does not have write access to the Moodle installation tree to do this for you).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, establish the correct place in the Moodle code tree for the plugin type. Common locations are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/theme/ - themes&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/mod/ - activity modules and resources&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/blocks/ - sidebar blocks&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/question/type/ - question types&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/course/format/ - course formats&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/admin/report/ - admin reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[:dev:Plugin types]] for the full list of all plugin types and their locations within the Moodle tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory]; select your current [[Moodle version]], then choose a plugin with a Download button and download the ZIP file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload or copy it to your Moodle server.&lt;br /&gt;
# Unzip it in the right place for the plugin type (or follow the plugin instructions). &lt;br /&gt;
# In your Moodle site (as admin) go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; (you should, for most plugin types, get a message saying the plugin is installed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The plugin may contain language files.  They&#039;ll be found by your Moodle automatically. These language strings can be customized using the standard &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Language&#039;&#039; editing interface. If you get a &amp;quot;Database error&amp;quot; when you try to edit your language files, there is a strong chance that the language files included within the downloaded ZIP file of this plugin have a coding problem. If you delete the &#039;&#039;plugin_name/lang/other_language_different_to_English/&#039;&#039; folder with the new language strings and the database error disappears, this is indeed the case. Please notify the plugin maintainer, so that it can be fixed in future releases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Errors===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you obtain an error, please [[Debugging|turn debugging on]] to obtain additional information about the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Database error while doing a language customization : May not be related to the [[Language customisation#Database error|Language customization]], but rather a problem with a recently installed plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;tool_installaddon/err_curl_exec - cURL error 60 : This suggests problems with the validation of the SSL certificate of the remote (moodle.org) site. This is also a known problem in Moodle Windows 7 servers running the Moodle package for Windows. See [[SSL certificate for moodle.org]] for more info and possible solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A file permissions error has occurred===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On certain 3.0.x versions, when installing plugins via the administration interface, the Moodle uses the configuration settings &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;directorypermissions&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;filepermissions&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. If these are not defined explicitly in your config.php, the default value is set automatically to 777 (rwxrwxrwx) for directories and 666 (rw-rw-rw-) for files (see lib/setup.php).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this default behaviour does not fit your needs and hosting environment, you may wish to specify more strict setting such as&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CFG-&amp;gt;directorypermissions = 02750;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A common error after installing plugins is that when you create an instance of the module and then save and display it, it reports the error, &amp;quot;A file permissions error has occurred. Please check the permissions on the script and the directory it is in and try again.&amp;quot; If you get this, the file permissions of the package are mostl likely set to 711 preventing them from running correctly. With your preferred FTP client or via your web hosts control panel, set the file permissions of all the files and directories in the installed module, e.g. /moodle/mod/[myplugin]/ to 755 and then see if you can successfully view the module instance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default exception handler: Error writing to database Debug: Duplicate entry &#039;en_us-...===&lt;br /&gt;
* These errors are usually caused by a third party plugin. &lt;br /&gt;
* To find the involved plugin, go to [http://lang.moodle.org http://lang.moodle.org] and use the AMOS tool to find all the strings with the given string identifier.&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove the suspected plugin and check if the error has disappeared. If so, please contact the plugin maintainer and report this issue.&lt;br /&gt;
* Please see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=219504 this forum thread] for known causes and fixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When installing manually===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check the file permissions. The web server needs to be able to read the plugin files. If the rest of Moodle works then try to make the plugin permissions and ownership match. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did you &#039;&#039;&#039;definitely&#039;&#039;&#039; unzip or install the plugin in the correct place?&lt;br /&gt;
* Because Moodle scans plugin folders for new plugins you cannot have any other files or folders there. Make sure you deleted the zip file and don&#039;t try to rename (for example) an old version of the plugin to some other name - it will break.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the directory name for the plugin is correct. All the names &#039;&#039;&#039;have&#039;&#039;&#039; to match. If you change the name, then it won&#039;t work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Obtaining help===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ask in a forum in [http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=5 Moodle in English]. Make sure you describe your system (including versions of MySQL, PHP etc.), what you tried and what happened. Copy and paste error messages exactly. Provide the link to the version of the plugin you downloaded (some have very similar names).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uninstalling a plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To uninstall a plugin&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; and click the Uninstall link opposite the plugin you wish to remove&lt;br /&gt;
# Use a file manager to remove/delete the actual plugin directory as instructed, otherwise Moodle will reinstall it next time you access the site administration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plugins overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:plugins overview.png|thumb|center|400px|Plugins overview highlighting available check button]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Plugins overview page in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; lists all installed plugins, together with the version number,release, availability (enabled or disabled) and settings link (if applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;Check for available updates&#039; button enables admins to quickly check for any updates available for plugins installed on the site (from the [http://moodle.org/plugins plugins directory]). Any updates available are highlighted, with further information and a download link in the notes column opposite the plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Plugin updating from within Moodle===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enable updates deployment in  &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Update notifications&#039;&#039;. Then when updates are available, &#039;Install this update&#039; buttons are shown on the Plugins overview page. See [[Automatic updates deployment]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing installing plugins from within Moodle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required, installing and updating from within Moodle can be prevented by copying the following lines of code from config-dist.php and pasting them in config.php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Use the following flag to completely disable the installation of plugins&lt;br /&gt;
// (new plugins, available updates and missing dependencies) and related&lt;br /&gt;
// features (such as cancelling the plugin installation or upgrade) via the&lt;br /&gt;
// server administration web interface.&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;disableupdateautodeploy = true;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=325804 list of (year 2015) favorite plugins] by Gavin Henrick&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Notifications]] for further details of update notifications&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Plugin Review Criteria]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Plugins FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Moodle in English [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=44 General plugins forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Moodle from Git repository#Installing a contributed extension from its Git repository|Installing a contributed extension from its Git repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For developers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:Category:Plugins|Plugins developer documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:Plugin validation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:On-click add-on installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Plugins installieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Instalar complementos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Installation de plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Installare plugin]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Using_Feedback&amp;diff=148189</id>
		<title>Using Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Using_Feedback&amp;diff=148189"/>
		<updated>2024-04-29T07:02:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Feedback}}&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains how students and teachers can use the [[Feedback activity]] and explores ways to make the most of it in your Moodle course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the student sees==&lt;br /&gt;
*When first clicking on a feedback activity, the student will be presented with an entry page with description and link to the feedback questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Feedbackstudententry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the link takes them to the feedback questions which they complete and then submit by clicking the &amp;quot;Submit your answers&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Studentfeedbackquestions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On submitting their responses, they will be directed to a particular URL or a &amp;quot;thankyou&amp;quot; page whose message can be personalised in the [[Feedback settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the teacher sees==&lt;br /&gt;
===Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
*When a feedback survey has been completed the teacher will see, via the Overview tab, the number of students who have responded so far:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teachertabs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Edit Questions tab will allow them to tweak their questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Template===&lt;br /&gt;
* Feeeback questions can be saved as a template from the Edit questions button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:feedbacktemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**An administrator(or other user with system permissions) can then save a template as &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; to allow it to be reused in different courses. A regular editing teacher does not have this capability. See [[Template creator]] for how to allow teachers the ability to save templates as &amp;quot;public&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:saveaspublic.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Template tab shows any available templates which have been created. See [[Feedback templates]] for more detailed information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Analysis===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows a graphical summary of the results of each question:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Analysis.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show responses===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows for the teacher to see and then delete individual responses if required, and download table data in various [[Data formats|formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show non-respondents===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unless the responses are set to anonymous, there will also be a &amp;quot;Show non-respondents&amp;quot; tab where the Teacher or Feedback activity administrator can select some or all users who have not yet completed the feedback and send them a reminder message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: users may be able to control when or how they receive this message, depending on the configuration of Messaging Outputs on your particular site. See [https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/Messaging_settings#List_of_message_types here for details].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:feeback-non-respondents-25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use Feedback?==&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the obvious use here of evaluating a course, feedback surveys have a variety of uses, both within a course and for non-logged in users on the front page. The ability to set them as &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot; means also that sensitive issues can be surveyed without students worrying who might see their responses. Some ideas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Guest surveys====&lt;br /&gt;
Anonymously, on the front page, non-logged in users such as parents can be questioned on their opinions about, e.g., the website design, school policies, school meals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up a guest survey, you need to enable some settings at site level, see &#039;&#039;&#039;How can I allow non-logged in users to give feedback?&#039;&#039;&#039; in [[Feedback FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sign up!====&lt;br /&gt;
Guests can be invited to sign up for events/courses via the feedback module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Contact us====&lt;br /&gt;
Non-logged in users can use an instance of the feedback module as a &amp;quot;contact us&amp;quot; form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Anti-bullying surveys====&lt;br /&gt;
Students can be asked to highlight anonymously any incidences of bullying, along with their location and type.&lt;br /&gt;
====Making choices====&lt;br /&gt;
Students can select course modules or subjects they wish to study in a subsequent year/semester. The results can be exported and easily collated to match availability.&lt;br /&gt;
====Use of Moodle!====&lt;br /&gt;
Staff can be surveyed on which Moodle modules they use/would like more training in&lt;br /&gt;
====IT Skills audit====&lt;br /&gt;
Staff - or students - can be surveyed to discover their IT skills and weaknesses to highlight training needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/mod/feedback/view.php?id=53 Example of feedback on a school&#039;s performance from School demo site] (Log in with username:parent/password:moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/mod/feedback/analysis.php?id=53&amp;amp;courseid=&amp;amp;do_show=analysis Example of analysis of feedback on a school&#039;s performance from School demo site] (Log in with username:teacher/password:moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Feedback nutzen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando retroalimentación]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:saveaspublic.png&amp;diff=148188</id>
		<title>File:saveaspublic.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:saveaspublic.png&amp;diff=148188"/>
		<updated>2024-04-29T07:02:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:feedbacktemplate.png&amp;diff=148187</id>
		<title>File:feedbacktemplate.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:feedbacktemplate.png&amp;diff=148187"/>
		<updated>2024-04-29T07:01:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Using_Feedback&amp;diff=148186</id>
		<title>Using Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Using_Feedback&amp;diff=148186"/>
		<updated>2024-04-29T07:01:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Feedback}}&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains how students and teachers can use the [[Feedback activity]] and explores ways to make the most of it in your Moodle course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the student sees==&lt;br /&gt;
*When first clicking on a feedback activity, the student will be presented with an entry page with description and link to the feedback questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Feedbackstudententry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking the link takes them to the feedback questions which they complete and then submit by clicking the &amp;quot;Submit your answers&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Studentfeedbackquestions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On submitting their responses, they will be directed to a particular URL or a &amp;quot;thankyou&amp;quot; page whose message can be personalised in the [[Feedback settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the teacher sees==&lt;br /&gt;
===Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
*When a feedback survey has been completed the teacher will see, via the Overview tab, the number of students who have responded so far:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teachertabs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Edit Questions tab will allow them to tweak their questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Template===&lt;br /&gt;
* Feeeback questions can be saved as a template from the Edit questions button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:feedbacktemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**An administrator(or other user with system permissions) can then save a template as &amp;quot;public&amp;quot; to allow it to be reused in different courses. A regular editing teacher does not have this capability. See [[Template creator]] for how to allow teachers the ability to save templates as &amp;quot;public&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:saveaspublic.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Template tab shows any available templates which have been created. . See [[Feedback templates]] for more detailed information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Analysis===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows a graphical summary of the results of each question:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Analysis.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show responses===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows for the teacher to see and then delete individual responses if required, and download table data in various [[Data formats|formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show non-respondents===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unless the responses are set to anonymous, there will also be a &amp;quot;Show non-respondents&amp;quot; tab where the Teacher or Feedback activity administrator can select some or all users who have not yet completed the feedback and send them a reminder message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: users may be able to control when or how they receive this message, depending on the configuration of Messaging Outputs on your particular site. See [https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/Messaging_settings#List_of_message_types here for details].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:feeback-non-respondents-25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use Feedback?==&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the obvious use here of evaluating a course, feedback surveys have a variety of uses, both within a course and for non-logged in users on the front page. The ability to set them as &amp;quot;anonymous&amp;quot; means also that sensitive issues can be surveyed without students worrying who might see their responses. Some ideas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Guest surveys====&lt;br /&gt;
Anonymously, on the front page, non-logged in users such as parents can be questioned on their opinions about, e.g., the website design, school policies, school meals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up a guest survey, you need to enable some settings at site level, see &#039;&#039;&#039;How can I allow non-logged in users to give feedback?&#039;&#039;&#039; in [[Feedback FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sign up!====&lt;br /&gt;
Guests can be invited to sign up for events/courses via the feedback module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Contact us====&lt;br /&gt;
Non-logged in users can use an instance of the feedback module as a &amp;quot;contact us&amp;quot; form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Anti-bullying surveys====&lt;br /&gt;
Students can be asked to highlight anonymously any incidences of bullying, along with their location and type.&lt;br /&gt;
====Making choices====&lt;br /&gt;
Students can select course modules or subjects they wish to study in a subsequent year/semester. The results can be exported and easily collated to match availability.&lt;br /&gt;
====Use of Moodle!====&lt;br /&gt;
Staff can be surveyed on which Moodle modules they use/would like more training in&lt;br /&gt;
====IT Skills audit====&lt;br /&gt;
Staff - or students - can be surveyed to discover their IT skills and weaknesses to highlight training needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/mod/feedback/view.php?id=53 Example of feedback on a school&#039;s performance from School demo site] (Log in with username:parent/password:moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://school.moodledemo.net/mod/feedback/analysis.php?id=53&amp;amp;courseid=&amp;amp;do_show=analysis Example of analysis of feedback on a school&#039;s performance from School demo site] (Log in with username:teacher/password:moodle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Feedback nutzen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando retroalimentación]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=BigBlueButton&amp;diff=148185</id>
		<title>BigBlueButton</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=BigBlueButton&amp;diff=148185"/>
		<updated>2024-04-25T13:24:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* What is the BigBlueButton activity? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the BigBlueButton activity?==&lt;br /&gt;
BigBlueButton lets you create from within Moodle links to real-time on-line classrooms using BigBlueButton, an open source web conferencing system for distance education. You can specify conference times, which are then added to the calendar, and, if allowed in your installation, the sessions may be recorded for viewing later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: For data protection reasons, BigBlueButton is disabled by default. Administrators must enable it from Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Manage activities and then check the box to  accept the data processing agreement. From 22 April 2024 they must also register on the BBB portal from the Settings page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Free Tier Hosting is currently restricted as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# The maximum length for each session is 60 minutes;&lt;br /&gt;
# The maximum number of concurrent users per session is 25;&lt;br /&gt;
# Recordings expire after seven (7) days and are not downloadable; and&lt;br /&gt;
# Viewers&#039; (student) webcams are only visible to the moderator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How is it set up?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/bHawNjjHGdU | desc = How to set up and use BigBlueButton}}&lt;br /&gt;
*In a course, with Edit mode enabled, choose, BigBlueButton from the activity chooser.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose a name and description, and, if desired, a welcome message which will appear in the Chat box when participants join the session.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you tick &amp;quot;wait for moderator&amp;quot;, students can only join once someone with the moderator role has entered the room.&lt;br /&gt;
*From the Participants list you can, if needed, give specific roles to specific people, such as a moderator role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled by the administrator from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt; BigBlueButton&amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;, a new section, Guest access,  becomes available to course teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Guest access to a BBB session is not possible if your site forces users to log in (ie, if &#039;forcelogin&#039; is enabled).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From Guest access, you can check the box to allow external users without accounts to join the room. When the box is checked, a meeting link and password become available.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BBBguestlink.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Schedule section you can set a start time and also a time after which student will not be able to enter the room.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does it work?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Once set up, the activity appears with a link to join when the time is correct. (Before then, or if a moderator is required first. a message appears saying the conference has not yet started.)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:bbb-room.png|alt=]]&lt;br /&gt;
*On entering the room, a message will appear asking if you want to use your microphone or just listen. If you choose microphone you will need to check your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*The moderator can choose whether to allow participants to use webcams and microphones or not.&lt;br /&gt;
*The central area can display presentations, polls, screensharing or an interactive whiteboard.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is also a chat option with public and private chat.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:bbb24 test-moodle.png|center|frameless|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
From Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; BigBlueButton, administrators can set the defaults for BBB sessions and recordings in courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From &#039;&#039;BigBlueButton &amp;gt; Extended capabilities&#039;&#039;, admins can control whether or not participant profile photos are shown in sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
* From &#039;&#039;BigBlueButton &amp;gt; Recordings&#039;&#039;, admins can specify which recording formats (such as presentations) may be viewed by everyone, and which (such as statistics) are restricted to those with the capability [[Capabilities/mod/bigbluebuttonbn:viewallrecordingformats| mod/bigbluebuttonbn:viewallrecordingformats.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:BigBlueButton]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:BigBlueButton]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:BigBlueButton]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Question_categories&amp;diff=148170</id>
		<title>Question categories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Question_categories&amp;diff=148170"/>
		<updated>2024-04-21T16:08:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
A question category can contain individual questions or other question categories.  They can be found by using the  [[Question bank]] or when [[Building Quiz|building a quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What are question categories?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:question-categories.png|thumb|300px|Question category as a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can imagine a question category as a folder on your desktop computer. Then, questions are stored in these categories in a similar way as your files are stored in a file system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category must have a name and you can include a short description of the category. You can create a &#039;&#039;category hierarchy&#039;&#039;.  For example, you can specify a parent category for each category or the &#039;Top&#039; as the parent, when a category has no parent. &#039;Top&#039; is not really a category. It just a parent for all the top-leve categories. It exists so that, when you are adding questions to the quiz, you can select it as a way to get any question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Creating question categories and sub categories is a good practice.  It is better than keeping all your questions in one big list in the quiz module.  The hierarchy feature enables you to separate categories into sub categories and sub categories into sub sub categories etc. indefinitely. Categories and sub categories, etc., are very powerful when combined with random questions that can select either from one category or from a category or any of its sub categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question Sharing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can share questions in several different [[Context|contexts]]. Sharing categories in the &#039;System&#039; context or &#039;Course&#039; context has a similar effect to publishing the category so others can see them or hiding a question category from specific users. See the [[Question contexts]] page for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default a course teacher cannot see or use any Question context above the course level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Category Set Up and Management==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From Course navigation click More (1) and then Question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
* From the Questions dropdown, (2) click to select Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categories434.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Below the list of current categories you will see a form to add a new category.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the &#039;parent&#039; category in which your new category will be placed. See image of &#039;Parent&#039; selector image to right. [[image:QuestionParentCategorySelector.jpg|right|thumb|346px|Question category selector]]&lt;br /&gt;
** Placing your category in another category makes it a sub-category of the parent.&lt;br /&gt;
** Choosing &#039;Top&#039; means that your category is a top level category, not a sub category. When more than one sharing context is available you can place your category as a top level category in any of the contexts.&lt;br /&gt;
** Notice you can choose to make your category a &#039;top level&#039; category in any context (see [[Question contexts]]) that is available to you. Or you can choose to add your category as a sub category of another category in the same context as the &lt;br /&gt;
* Type the name of your new question category in the text box.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add an optional meaningful description in the category info area.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &#039;Add Category&#039; button. Your new question category will appear in the list of current categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Deleting Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categories can also be created or deleted at will. However, if you try to delete a category containing questions, then you will be asked to specify another category to move them to. You cannot delete or move the last category in any context, there must always be one category in a context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Moving categories===&lt;br /&gt;
You can also arrange the categories in a hierarchy so that they are easier to manage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Reassign top category to move categories====&lt;br /&gt;
Use the question bank&amp;gt;categories link to change the parent category. This will change the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using arrow icons to move categories====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The up/down arrow icons lets you change the order in which category &#039;peers&#039; are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The up / down icons are also used to move a &#039;&#039;&#039;top-level&#039;&#039;&#039; category between contexts. If you move a category to be the first or last category in a context and then press the arrow key again then it will be moved to the next context.&lt;br /&gt;
* The right arrow icon allows you to move a category to be a child category of the category listed immediately above it.&lt;br /&gt;
* The left arrow icon allows you to move a category up one category level (to be a peer of its parent category).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;See the tool tip that appears when you place the mouse pointer above these icons if you&#039;re not sure what action an icon will perform.&#039;&#039; You cannot move the last category in any context, there must always be at least one category left in all contexts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question contexts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=47540 I can see other teacher&#039;s categories] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragenkategorien]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Categorías de preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Catégories de questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Категории вопросов]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:categories434.png&amp;diff=148169</id>
		<title>File:categories434.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:categories434.png&amp;diff=148169"/>
		<updated>2024-04-21T16:07:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Add category/ies&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:sitepagedelete.png&amp;diff=148168</id>
		<title>File:sitepagedelete.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:sitepagedelete.png&amp;diff=148168"/>
		<updated>2024-04-21T07:28:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Site_home_FAQ&amp;diff=148167</id>
		<title>Site home FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Site_home_FAQ&amp;diff=148167"/>
		<updated>2024-04-21T07:28:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* How do I get rid of a resource/activity that&amp;#039;s appeared in &amp;quot;Site Pages&amp;quot;? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Front page}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What do we mean by the &#039;site home&#039; of Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site home is the front page. The front page link in the navigation block and navigation bar is called &#039;Home&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When logged in, a user&#039;s customised home page is called the &#039;Dashboard&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the look of the site home?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are various ways of enhancing your site home without needing access to theme files on the server. First, see the section on tips and tricks in [[Front page settings]]. &lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using Classic, Boost or other bootstrap-based themes  you can then do some cool things with Bootstrap layout elements, as described in the thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=267662 LOOK &amp;amp; LEARN: How to add marketing spots as a front page topic].&lt;br /&gt;
*See also the simple customisation of the School demo front page in [[Standard themes]].&lt;br /&gt;
*You can set  a different front page for guests and logged in users with [[Conditional activities]] as described in the thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=268238 Show a different page to guests and logged in users].&lt;br /&gt;
*You may consider installing a custom theme from the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=3 Moodle plugins directory].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I add text and a picture to the centre column?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site home &amp;gt; Site home settings &#039;&#039; make sure that &#039;Include a topic section&#039; is ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Site home and click the edit icon at the top of the centre column&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the cog icon to add text and a picture to the Summary &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the logo to the site home?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes&#039;&#039; click the name of the theme you are using (If you&#039;re not sure which theme you are using, you can find out in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme selector&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the URL for your logo. (Note - you must previously have uploaded your logo somewhere online)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This setting is only available for certain themes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get rid of a resource/activity that&#039;s appeared in &amp;quot;Site Pages&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
When a resource or activity (like a page, file or forum) is added to the [[Main menu block]]  on the front page, it will appear as a Site page. To remove this link, turn on the editing on the front page, go to, unhide or add the [[Main menu block]] and click to delete the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sitepagedelete.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent activities I made on the front page being seen in the navigation block?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uncheck the box &amp;quot;Show front page activities in the navigation&amp;quot;  in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I hide front page blocks from guests but show to logged in users?==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Blocks FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I show front page blocks to guests but hide from logged in users?==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Blocks FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
==I want to limit the number of courses that appear on the Front Page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this time, there is no easy way to do this, as such. In  &#039;&#039; Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;Courses&#039;&#039;, you can change the number of courses to be displayed on one page to a different number. Currently, the default is 20, but you can make it whatever you want. It is still messy, though. You can also, from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Front page&amp;gt;Front page settings&#039;&#039;, change what is displayed after login to show only categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One way of resolving this issue is to replace the course and Category list on the Front Page with a HTML block that links off to the various category pages. This keeps your courses off the front page altogether. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a couple of ways to do this, you can have a list of Categories, in a table, or you can use a table full of icons, much the same as Moodle&#039;s front page. Depending on your number of Categories, say 11 different subject areas and one Administration area creates a table either four columns or four rows. For most people, the orderly nature of a balanced table implies an orderly site that is really welcome, particularly if the images linking to a Category are clear and the alt tag text says what it is linking to.&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable logged-in users to participate in front page activities?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; and edit the &#039;Authenticated user on frontpage&#039; role&lt;br /&gt;
# Allow capabilities for the front page activities&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Front Page &amp;gt; Front Page settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the default front page role to student&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I add a page to the front page?==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
#With the editing turned on, add the [[Main menu block]] if it isn&#039;t already present.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &#039;&#039;Add and activity or resource&#039;&#039; and add a [[Page]].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If you wish the page to be hidden but accessible from the top dropdown menu, then:&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the page&#039;s URL.&lt;br /&gt;
#Hide the block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;Themes&amp;gt;Theme settings&#039;&#039; and add your page URL to the custom menu items box according to the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if it is possible to install plugins on your Moodle site then you can also use the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/local_staticpage Static pages plugin].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I get rid of the site short name in the navigation bar?==&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes if the short and full names of your site are similar, you might wish to hide the short name. If you are using the Clean or More theme, you can do this by adding lines to the custom CSS box in the appropriate theme settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To hide the short name but keep the space where it used to be, add:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 a.brand {visibility:hidden}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To hide the short name and also remove the space where it used to be, add:&lt;br /&gt;
 .navbar .brand {display: none;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ Page d&#039;accueil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Startseite FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Portada FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Description_question_type&amp;diff=148166</id>
		<title>Description question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Description_question_type&amp;diff=148166"/>
		<updated>2024-04-20T06:58:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
A Description question type simply shows some text or media without requiring an answer. It is more of a label than a question type.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use a description question type?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When shuffling questions is turned off, the description question type can provide information to be used by a following group of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the [[Text editor]] you can embed a video, audio file or links to an external site. This means you can have a quiz where learners must, for example, watch a video and then answer questions on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the description question types are not included when adding random questions from a category: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=324179&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:説明問題タイプ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_descripci%C3%B3]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta Descripción]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question description]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragetyp Beschreibung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:試卷說明]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Description_question_type&amp;diff=148165</id>
		<title>Description question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Description_question_type&amp;diff=148165"/>
		<updated>2024-04-20T06:54:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
A Description question type simply shows some text or media without requiring an answer. It is more of a label than a question type.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use a description question type?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When shuffling questions is turned off, the description question type can provide information to be used by a following group of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
Using the text editor you can embed a video, audio file or links to an external site. This means you can have a quiz where learners must, for example, watch a video and then answer questions on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the description question types are not included when adding random questions from a category: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=324179&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:説明問題タイプ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_descripci%C3%B3]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta Descripción]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question description]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragetyp Beschreibung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:試卷說明]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Quiz_manual_grading_report&amp;diff=148163</id>
		<title>Quiz manual grading report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Quiz_manual_grading_report&amp;diff=148163"/>
		<updated>2024-04-19T10:50:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz reports}}&lt;br /&gt;
The manual grading report may be viewed by clicking the quiz in question and then clicking &#039;&#039;Results&#039;&#039; and from the dropdown selecting &#039;&#039;Manual grading&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first screen of the report lists all the questions in the quiz that need to be, or have been, manually graded (for example essay questions) with the number of attempts. There is an option to also show the questions that have been automatically graded, which if useful if you ever need to edit the grades by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ManualgradingQuiz.png|Needs grading opening screen&lt;br /&gt;
File:ManualgradingQuizPreferences.png|Preferences to display manual grading page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there are different sorting options, allowing you for example to order the attempts by student first name or last name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manualgradingordering.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manual Grading change after quiz attempt==&lt;br /&gt;
If a quiz has “Manual grading” behaviour enabled, and the quiz has attempts afterwards, any change to the setting will *not* update the behaviour in a retrospective manner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: setting a quiz to Manual grading and then changing it to Deferred feedback after attempting the quiz (or having previous attempts), will not activate automatic regrading for those attempts. I.e. those attempts will still need to be manually graded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
There is one [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=quiz_gradingstudents Manual grading by student] additional plugin which lets you grade all the responses by one student, rather than all the responses to one question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test: Manuelle Bewertung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Reporte de calificación manual de examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Upload_users&amp;diff=148068</id>
		<title>Upload users</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Upload_users&amp;diff=148068"/>
		<updated>2024-03-19T10:44:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: category role bulk assign&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Accounts}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Uploading users via text file==&lt;br /&gt;
There are many options for uploading information (fields associated with a user) with this method: from enrolling users in multiple courses with course specific [[roles]] to updating user information in the [[User profile]] to deleting users from the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; It is usually not necessary to upload users in bulk with Upload users. To keep maintenance work down you should first explore forms of authentication that do not require manual maintenance, such as [[External database authentication|connecting to existing external databases]] or letting the users create their own accounts ([[Self enrolment]]). See [[Authentication]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
{{MediaPlayer | url = https://youtu.be/UCuOOGD7XPI| desc = How to bulk upload users and add to courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
==File formats for upload users file==&lt;br /&gt;
The upload users file has fields separated by a comma (or other delimiter) ONLY - no space. The first line contains the valid field names. The rest of the lines (records) contain information about each user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Avoid special characters in field information like quotes or other commas. Test a file with only one record before a large upload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; You can use a spread sheet program to create the file with the required columns and fields. Then save the file as &amp;quot;CSV (comma delimited)&amp;quot;. These files can be opened with simple text editors (e.g., [https://notepad-plus-plus.org/ Notepad++]) for verification. &lt;br /&gt;
===Valid upload file for testing===&lt;br /&gt;
*From Site administration / Users / Upload users, an example text (example.csv) file is available. It can be downloaded and adapted to your needs. It includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 username,firstname,lastname,email&lt;br /&gt;
 student1,Student,One,s1@example.com&lt;br /&gt;
 student2,Student,Two,s2@example.com&lt;br /&gt;
 student3,Student,Three,s3@example.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional fields can be added as below. The course and cohort must already have been manually created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 username,firstname,lastname,email,course1,group1,cohort1&lt;br /&gt;
 student1,Student,One,s1@example.com,math102,groupA,cohortZ&lt;br /&gt;
 student2,Student,Two,s2@example.com,math102,groupB,cohort Y&lt;br /&gt;
 student3,Student,Three,s3@example.com,math102,groupA,cohortZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Fields that can be included==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; We strongly recommend that you test a file that contains fields you proposed to use with one user before attempting a file upload for the first time. &lt;br /&gt;
===Required fields===&lt;br /&gt;
These are the required user identification fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username,firstname,lastname,email&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Validity checks are performed for:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039; can only contain alphabetical &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; letters, numbers, hypen &#039;-&#039;, underscore &#039;_&#039;, period &#039;.&#039;, or at-sign &#039;@&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;email&#039;&#039;&#039; is in the form: &#039;&#039;name@example.com&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Passwords===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;password&amp;quot; field is optional if the &#039;New user password&#039; setting on the upload screen is set to &amp;quot;Create password if needed and send via email&amp;quot; but is required if the setting is &amp;quot;Field required in file&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If included, values should meet the requirements for the site&#039;s [[Site policies#Password policy|Password policy]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To force password change for a particular user, set the password field to &#039;&#039;&#039;changeme&#039;&#039;&#039;. If omitted, a password will be generated for each user (during the next Cron job) and welcome e-mails sent out. The text for the welcome e-mail is in the language settings in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language customisation&#039;&#039; with a String identifier of &#039;newusernewpasswordtext&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Optional user fields===&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Commas within a field must be encoded as &amp;amp;#44 - the script will decode these back to commas.&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: For Boolean fields with only two values, use &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; for false and &#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;for true. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To provide values other than the default you can include one or more of these optional user fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;institution,department,city,country,lang,auth,timezone,idnumber,icq,phone1,phone2,address,url,description,mailformat,maildisplay,maildigest,htmleditor,autosubscribe,interests,theme&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the these are user profile fields or user preference fields that belong to the user profile and are the filled in the user or at manual creation. Some however require specific formats:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Additional name fields]] for more details. Key things to note are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;country&#039;&#039;&#039; - use the country TWO LETTER CODE, in upper case, e.g. AU,ES,GB,US. These are all UPPER CASE. Using &amp;quot;au&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;USA&amp;quot; as a country code will result in a database error. If you are having trouble working out the two-letter code for a country, you can consult the list of [https://www.iso.org/obp/ui/#search country names and code elements] available on the ISO Website. A common error is to use UK for United Kingdom; it should be GB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;lang&#039;&#039;&#039; - use the two letter (or extended four letter) code as defined in the Moodle language packs, e.g. en, es, en_us, de, in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language packs&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;auth&#039;&#039;&#039; - The auth field must be used if the site uses an alternative authentication method, such as LDAP, as otherwise the authentication method will default to manual and users using a different auth method won&#039;t be able to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
Use the shortname codes defined in Plugins &amp;gt; Authentication for the various types, e.g. manual, nlogin, ldap, cas, mnet, db, none. If you do not include an auth column, then newly created users will be created with the manual account type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set &amp;quot;auth&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;nologin&amp;quot; in your csv file which will mean that then created users cannot login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;timezone&#039;&#039;&#039; - Should be in the format as found in the Location settings in terms of Zone/Region, e.g. Australia/Sydney, Asia/Kathmandu, Europe/Madrid, etc. The entry is case sensitive so Europe/London will work but europe/london will not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Needed: settings for &#039;&#039;&#039;mailformat&#039;&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039;&#039;maildisplay&#039;&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039;&#039;htmleditor&#039;&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039;&#039;autosubscribe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;maildigest&#039;&#039;&#039; To prevent users from receiving a large number of emails from courses or forced subscription forums use the &#039;&#039;&#039;maildigest&#039;&#039;&#039;. The options for this field are 0 = No digest, 1 = Complete digest and 2 = Digest with just subjects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;maildisplay&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to set the email display option for a user. The options for this field are 0 = Hide my email address from non-privileged users, 1 = Allow everyone to see my email address and 2 = Allow only other course members to see my email address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;emailstop&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to prevent notifications. The options for this field are 0 = no notifications and 1 = allow notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;theme&#039;&#039;&#039; User themes may be added by using &#039;classic&#039;, &#039;boost&#039; or the name of any other installed theme. The value should be the short name of the theme, e.g. &#039;boost&#039; not &#039;Boost&#039;, &#039;fordson&#039; not &#039;Fordson&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom profile field names===&lt;br /&gt;
These are optional and depend on whether you have created any custom profile fields in your site. The name of the header in file is of the form &#039;profile_field_xxxxx&#039; where xxxx is the unique shortname of custom user profile field name as you created it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field name should match the case of the profile field shortname. So, for instance if the shortname of your custom profile field is all upper case, for example, &#039;&#039;DOB&#039;&#039;, then use a header of &#039;&#039;profile_field_DOB&#039;&#039; to match the case, not &#039;&#039;profile_field_dob&#039;&#039;, which will produce a &amp;quot;is not a valid field name&amp;quot; error. Likewise, a mixed case shortname such as &#039;&#039;Dob&#039;&#039; should have a header of &#039;&#039;profile_field_Dob&#039;&#039;. (The exception to this is if the shortname is all lower case, then any case will work in the field header, which is a historical quirk: but best practice is to match the case and you will avoid errors.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;profile_field_xxxxx&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;: To create a custom field &amp;quot;genre&amp;quot;, you must write a shortname &amp;quot;genre&amp;quot; in the new field, and write &amp;quot;profile_field_genre&amp;quot; in the header of the .csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For custom profile fields that are dates, use the ISO standard format YYYY-MM-DD, e.g. 2014-06-19 which will then be properly localized in the interfaced. For example, a field called dohire for date of hire, the fields could be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
username,firstname,lastname,email,profile_field_dohire&lt;br /&gt;
blumbergh,Bill,Lumbergh,blumbergh@example.com,1990-02-19&lt;br /&gt;
pgibbons,Peter,BGibbons,pgibbons@example.com,1996-06-05&lt;br /&gt;
tsmykowski,Tom,Smykowski,tsmykowski@example.com,1970-01-01 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For custom profile fields that are a menu, use the corresponding value in the menu list from field as you defined it. For example: a custom field &#039;corporatedivision&#039; with one of three values &#039;Management&#039;, &#039;Development&#039; or &#039;Training&#039;. Just insert one of those three words (e.g. &#039;Training&#039;) as the value for that field. E.g.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
username,firstname,lastname,email,profile_field_corporatedivision&lt;br /&gt;
blumbergh,Bill,Lumbergh,blumbergh@example.com,Management&lt;br /&gt;
pgibbons,Peter,BGibbons,pgibbons@example.com,Development&lt;br /&gt;
tsmykowski,Tom,Smykowski,tsmykowski@example.com,Training &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special user change fields===&lt;br /&gt;
Three special fields are used for managing user accounts, &#039;&#039;&#039;oldusername&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;suspended&#039;&#039;&#039;. [[#Allow_renames|See below for details]].&lt;br /&gt;
===Enrolment fields===&lt;br /&gt;
You may optionally enrol users in already existing courses using manual enrolment. Only manual enrolment is done this way; if the manual enrolment method is disabled in a course, then no enrol is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You use fields in the upload file of this type:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;course1,type1,role1,group1,enroltimestart1,enrolperiod1,enrolstatus1,course2,type2,role2,group2,enroltimestart2,enrolperiod2,enrolstatus2&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Header fields &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; have a numeric suffix such that type1,role1,group1,enrolperiod1 and enrolstatus1 all apply to course1 for course&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; to course&#039;&#039;&#039;n&#039;&#039;&#039;. Even if you are just doing one course enrolment, you must still use the number 1 on the heading name, i.e. course1,role1, etc. Do not use the bare headings without numbers, e.g. course,role, etc. as those will generate an error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;course#&#039;&#039;&#039; is the shortname of the course, if present the user will be enrolled in that course. Do not use the fullname of the course or it will generate an error. This field is the ONLY required field for a successful enrolment. All the others are optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;type#&#039;&#039;&#039; sets the role to be used for the enrolment. A value of 1 is default course role, 2 is legacy Teacher role and 3 is legacy Non-editing Teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;role#&#039;&#039;&#039; may be used to specify roles directly, using either role short name or the role id (numeric names of roles are not supported). Usually you will use the role name that is the shortname of the role as defined in Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles, e.g. student, editingteacher. If the role column is left out, the users will be enroled in the course with the default role, which is normally student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;group#&#039;&#039;&#039; may be used to assign users to groups in course, using name or id (numeric group names are not supported). NOTE: if the group does not already exist, it will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;enroltimestart#&#039;&#039;&#039; may be used to set the enrolment start time, for each course. If not explicitly set here, the enrolment start time is set to be today. To set a date: &amp;quot;2021-02-15&amp;quot; and to set a date and time &amp;quot;2021-02-15 15:30&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;enrolperiod#&#039;&#039;&#039; may be used to set the enrolment duration, in days, for each course. If not explicitly set here, all the users will get the duration as set in the Manual enrolment method of the course (which defaults to 0 meaning unlimited.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;enrolstatus#&#039;&#039;&#039; is optional as by default all newly enrolled users are set to active. If used a value of 1, it will suspend users in the course and if a user is previously set as inactive / suspended then a value of 0 will unsuspend them and make them active again.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cohort membership assignment===&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign users to any already existing Cohort by using only the &amp;quot;username&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;Cohort ID&amp;quot; with just two fields in the file. Note that this is an exception to the usual case where the firstname, lastname and email address of the user are required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;cohort#&#039;&#039;&#039; is the form to use and like enrolment in courses, you have to add a number to each header, so cohort1,cohort2, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internal cohort ID numbers or non-numeric Cohort IDs of existing cohorts must be used; do not use the full name as this is not allowed. (Note that cohort ID is what is usually known elsewhere as the &amp;quot;shortname&amp;quot;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a sample CSV file:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
username,cohort1,cohort2&lt;br /&gt;
student1,nursing,2016class&lt;br /&gt;
student2,nursing,2014class&lt;br /&gt;
student3,nursing,2014class&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MNet ===&lt;br /&gt;
Existing [[MNet]]users can be added to courses, groups or cohorts as below by using the field header &#039;&#039;&#039;mnethostid&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#enrolling to courses: username+mnethostid+course required&lt;br /&gt;
#adding to group: username+mnethostid+course+group required&lt;br /&gt;
#adding to cohort: username+mnethostid+cohort required&lt;br /&gt;
#suspending/reviving accounts: username+mnethostid+suspended required&lt;br /&gt;
All other operations are ignored. You can not add users, delete them or update them (such as change names or email, profile fields, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set system roles ===&lt;br /&gt;
Users may also be assigned to already defined system roles, using the shortname of the system role as defined in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; for roles with a system context defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sysrole1,sysrole2,sysrole3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users may be uploaded to a system role (usually Manager or Course creator) by entering the shortname of that role. Other roles can only be uploaded if they have already been assigned in the &#039;system&#039; context. See [[Creating custom roles]]. Multiple roles can be assigned using sysrole2, sysrole3, etc. fields. Note that the number suffix in no way relates to the number suffixes on the enrolment fields. The numbers must go up in sequence starting at 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unassigning system roles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also be removed from a given system role by entering the shortname of that role prefixed with a minus symbol: &#039;-&#039;. If the user is currently assigned to that role, they are removed from it. If the user is not currently assigned to that system role, the field value is ignored. However, the field value must refer to a system role that does exist on the system, otherwise an error will occur.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalRoles1.png|thumb|500px|center|Example of a file for uploading users with global/system roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set category roles ===&lt;br /&gt;
Users may be uploaded to a category role (usually Manager or Course creator)by entering the shortname of that role in the column &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;categoryrole1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and by adding a column/columns &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;category1, category2, etc&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which uses the ID number of the category (obtained or manually added by editing the category) &lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:uploaduserscatroles.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To bulk upload category teachers, see [[Teacher_role#Bulk_assigning_the_Teacher_role_in_a_category|Bulk assigning the teacher role in a category]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Upload user process==&lt;br /&gt;
# Create file for uploading&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Upload users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add file to upload&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users preview - check settings and default user profile settings&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users preview - click &amp;quot;Upload users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users results - shows list of users, exceptions made in upload and summary of number of users&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users results - click &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Returns to Upload users screen&lt;br /&gt;
==Updating users preview==&lt;br /&gt;
There are various settings to better control the desired upload behaviour. These settings are found on the &amp;quot;Upload users preview&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: errors updating existing accounts can affect your users badly. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Be careful&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; when using the options to update.&lt;br /&gt;
====Upload type====&lt;br /&gt;
The Upload type specifies how to handle existing accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
;Add new only, skip existing users : is the default Moodle upload type. It creates a new user account for each new record in the uploaded file. If an existing username is found in the uploaded file matches an existing username, that record is &#039;&#039;&#039;skipped&#039;&#039;&#039;. By skipping the existing user account, the data in the existing record is not touched (in contrast to the &amp;quot;Add new and update existing users&amp;quot; option) and a second new user account is &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; created (in contrast to the &amp;quot;Add all, append number to usernames if needed&amp;quot; option). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Add all, append number to usernames if needed : creates a new user account for each record in the uploaded file. If an existing user account is found, a new account will be created with a number appended to the username. For example, if a user account for username &#039;jsmith&#039; already exists and a new record in the uploaded file contains a record forusername &#039;jsmith&#039; an additional user account is created with a 1 &#039;&#039;&#039;appended&#039;&#039;&#039; to the username to produce user &#039;jsmith1&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Add new and update existing users: creates a new user account for each new user in the upload file. If an existing user account with the same username is found, the account information is &#039;&#039;&#039;updated&#039;&#039;&#039; by the data in the uploaded file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Update existing users only : ignores any new users found in the upload file and updates the user account if a matching username record is found in the uploaded file.&lt;br /&gt;
====New user password====&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new user account Moodle can create a new password (if one is not provided) or require a password in the uploaded file.&lt;br /&gt;
;Create password if needed and send via email: creates a random default password for each new user account if one is not provided in the uploaded file, and emails the user their user information and new password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Field required in file : requires that a password be provided in the uploaded file in order. If a password is not provided, an error is generated and the user account is not created. No notification of this user information or password is sent to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====Existing user details====&lt;br /&gt;
The Existing user details options are only available when the Upload type allows existing user accounts to be updated. It specifies how Moodle should process user detail information for existing users.&lt;br /&gt;
;No changes : ignores user detail data in the uploaded file and leaves the existing user account data unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
;Override with file : overwrites data in the existing user account with the data provided in the uploaded file.&lt;br /&gt;
;Override with file and defaults : overwrites data in the existing user account with data provided in the uploaded file and fills in the default values for existing user details when no data is provided in the uploaded file.&lt;br /&gt;
;Fill in missing from file and defaults : adds data in the existing user account with data provided in the uploaded file if the field is empty (does not already contain data) and fills in the default values for existing user details when no data is provided in the uploaded file.&lt;br /&gt;
====Existing user password====&lt;br /&gt;
The Existing user password option appears when you you have set the &amp;quot;Existing user details&amp;quot; setting to &amp;quot;Overwrite with file&amp;quot;. It specifies how to handle password data for existing user accounts, to change them or leave them as it. This is a bit of insurance to make sure that you really want to mass change user passwords.&lt;br /&gt;
;No changes : ignores password field in the uploaded user file and leaves the existing user account password untouched&lt;br /&gt;
;Update : overwrites the existing user account password with the password provided in the uploaded file&lt;br /&gt;
====Force password change====&lt;br /&gt;
The Force password change option specifies when to tag a user account so that the next login attempt will require the user to change the user&#039;s password.&lt;br /&gt;
;Users having a weak password : If the user account has a weak password as defined by the site&#039;s [[Password policy#Password policy|Password policy]] then the user will be forced to change the password during the next login attempt. This option is not shown if there the site does not have a [[Password policy#Password policy|Password policy]]. &lt;br /&gt;
;None : None of the users in the uploaded file will be forced to change the password during the user&#039;s next login attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
;All : All of the users in the uploaded file will be forced to change the password during the user&#039;s next login attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Match on email address====&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to optionally match users by emails when uploading them if allowaccountssameemail is set to no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Allow renames====&lt;br /&gt;
If the uploaded file contains the special &#039;&#039;&#039;oldusername&#039;&#039;&#039; field, it is possible to rename a user from the &#039;&#039;&#039;oldusername&#039;&#039;&#039; to a new &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The default setting is to &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; allow renames. Keep in mind that renaming a user will require the user to use the new username when logging in.&lt;br /&gt;
;No : ignores the &#039;&#039;&#039;oldusername&#039;&#039;&#039; field and leaves the existing user account&#039;s username field unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
;Yes : allows the existing user account&#039;s username to be changed by the data provided in the uploaded file&#039;s username field. The &#039;&#039;&#039;oldusername&#039;&#039;&#039; will be searched for and then updated with the data provided in the username column.&lt;br /&gt;
====Allow deletes====&lt;br /&gt;
If the uploaded file contains the &#039;&#039;&#039;deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; special field, it is possible to use the upload file to delete existing user accounts. The default setting is to &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; allow deletes. Keep in mind that deleting a user account will prevent that user from logging in. As a protection, site administrator user accounts cannot be deleted with this method. &lt;br /&gt;
;No : ignores the &#039;&#039;&#039;deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; special field in the uploaded file and leaves the existing user account unchanged&lt;br /&gt;
;Yes : allows the existing user account to be deleted when the value of the &#039;&#039;&#039;deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; field is 1. &lt;br /&gt;
====Allow suspending and activating of accounts====&lt;br /&gt;
If the uploaded file contains the &#039;&#039;&#039;suspended&#039;&#039;&#039; special field, it is possible to use the upload file to either suspend or make active (unsuspend) existing user accounts. The default setting is to allow suspending/activating of existing user accounts. Keep in mind that suspending an existing user account will prevent that user from logging in. &lt;br /&gt;
;Yes : allows the existing user account to be suspended when the value of the &#039;&#039;&#039;suspended&#039;&#039;&#039; field is 1. &lt;br /&gt;
;No : ignores the &#039;&#039;&#039;suspended&#039;&#039;&#039; special field in the uploaded file and leaves the existing user account status unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
====Prevent email address duplicates====&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible, but &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; recommended to upload users with duplicate email addresses. By default, uploading users with duplicate email addresses is prevented. To allow duplicate email addresses, go to Site administration ► Plugins ► Authentication ► Manage authentication. You can tick &amp;quot;Allow accounts with same email&amp;quot;. Then on the upload users screen you will be allowed to change the &amp;quot;Prevent email address duplicates&amp;quot; setting. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, doing this is not recommended for file uploads. Test thoroughly any user uploads before implementing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more info, see the [[Managing authentication#Allow accounts with same email|Managing authentication]] docs page&lt;br /&gt;
;Yes :prevents user accounts from being created from the uploaded if an existing user account already has the same email address as found in the uploaded file&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;email&#039;&#039;&#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
;No :allows user accounts to be created if an existing user account already has the same email address found in the uploaded file&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;email&#039;&#039;&#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
====Standardise usernames====&lt;br /&gt;
Standardise usernames is used by default to convert the username to all lower case and to strip out illegal characters. It is possible to not standardise the usernames; however, doing so is &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
;Yes : standardises usernames found in the uploaded file before updating existing or creating new user accounts so that the username contains only lowercase letters and numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
;No : skips standardising usernames found in the uploaded file so that the newly created or updated usernames will be exactly as they are in the uploaded file (&#039;&#039;&#039;not recommended&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
For those seeking a more technical explanation, the process for standardising the usernames consists of ensuring the characters are all UTF-8 (fix_utf8) encoded, converting the username to lower case, and then stripping out non-letters/non-number characters, except underscore (_), hyphen (-), period (.) and at symbol (@), which are allowed by default, (unless &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies &amp;gt; Allow extended characters in usernames&#039;&#039; is set on) with something similar to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$username = preg_replace(&#039;/[^-\.@_a-z0-9]/&#039;, &#039;&#039;, $username);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Select for bulk user actions====&lt;br /&gt;
After the uploaded file has finished being processed (all new accounts have been created and existing accounts updated as specified by the previous settings), there is an option to select some of those user accounts to perform additional [[admin/user/user bulk|bulk user actions]] such as &lt;br /&gt;
*Confirm user accounts created through Email-based self-registration which are not yet confirmed by the user&lt;br /&gt;
*Send a message (requires Messaging to be enabled)&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete user accounts&lt;br /&gt;
*Display a list of users on a page&lt;br /&gt;
*Download user data in text, ODS or Excel file format&lt;br /&gt;
*Force users to change their passwords&lt;br /&gt;
*Add users to a cohort&lt;br /&gt;
By default, no users are selected for [[admin/user/user bulk|bulk user actions]].&lt;br /&gt;
;No : No users are selected for [[admin/user/user bulk|bulk user actions]]&lt;br /&gt;
;New users : Only newly created users are selected for [[admin/user/user bulk|bulk user actions]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Updated users : Only updated user accounts are selected for [[admin/user/user bulk|bulk user actions]]&lt;br /&gt;
;All users : All users found (existing updated users and newly created user accounts) in the uploaded file are selected for [[admin/user/user bulk|bulk user actions]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values===&lt;br /&gt;
You can provide default user values for some fields not included in the uploaded file. Some fields include:&lt;br /&gt;
*Email display&lt;br /&gt;
*Forum auto-subscribe&lt;br /&gt;
*City/town&lt;br /&gt;
*ID number&lt;br /&gt;
*Institution&lt;br /&gt;
*Department&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Show more....&#039;&#039;&#039; link, other default user profile fields will show up. You can set 17 different fields here, including the Authentication method, Country. Language, Timezone, as well as most other standard User profile fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Other fields&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have created any custom profile fields for your users, they will show up here.&lt;br /&gt;
==Upload user results ==&lt;br /&gt;
After accepting the preview settings by clicking on &amp;quot;Upload users&amp;quot;, you should see the Upload users results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload users results 2.0.JPG|thumb|center|The results screen; everything went well!]]&lt;br /&gt;
This screen will show you any exceptions or changes that were made to each user in the upload process. For example, if you were updating user information, the updated information will be shown. Or if a user was not added that record will be highlighted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will summarize how many users were uploaded or updated, indicate the number of weak passwords and the number of errors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced potentials of Upload user==&lt;br /&gt;
===Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: This section needs checking and updating if necessary for Moodle 2.0. Please do so and remove this note when finished.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default values are processed as templates in which the following codes are allowed:&lt;br /&gt;
* %l - will be replaced by the lastname&lt;br /&gt;
* %f - will be replaced by the firstname&lt;br /&gt;
* %u - will be replaced by the username&lt;br /&gt;
* %% - will be replaced by the %&lt;br /&gt;
Between the percent sign (%) and any code letter (l, f or u) the following modifiers are allowed:&lt;br /&gt;
* (-) minus sign - the information specified by the code letter will be converted to lowercase&lt;br /&gt;
* (+) plus sign - the information specified by the code letter will be converted to UPPERCASE&lt;br /&gt;
* (~) tilde sign - the information specified by the code letter will be converted to Title Case&lt;br /&gt;
* a decimal number - the information specified by the code letter will be truncated to that many characters&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if the firstname is John and the lastname is Doe, the following values will be obtained with the specified templates:&lt;br /&gt;
* %l%f = DoeJohn&lt;br /&gt;
* %l%1f = DoeJ&lt;br /&gt;
* %-l%+f = doeJOHN&lt;br /&gt;
* %-f_%-l = john_doe&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt; http://www.example.com/~%u/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; results in &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.example.com/~jdoe/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (if the username is jdoe or %-1f%-l)&lt;br /&gt;
Template processing is done only on default values, and not on the values retrieved from the CSV file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create correct Moodle usernames, the username is always converted to lowercase. Moreover, if the &amp;quot;Allow extended characters in usernames&amp;quot; option in the Site policies page is off, characters different to letters, digits, dash (-) and dot (.) are removed. For example, if the firstname is John Jr. and the lastname is Doe, the username %-f_%-l will produce john jr._doe when Allow extended characters in usernames is on, and johnjr.doe when off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the &amp;quot;New username duplicate handling&amp;quot; setting is set to Append counter, an auto-increment counter will be append to duplicate usernames produced by the template. For example, if the CSV file contains the users named John Doe, Jane Doe and Jenny Doe without explicit usernames, the default username is %-1f%-l and New username duplicate handling is set to Append counter, then the usernames produced will be jdoe, jdoe2 and jdoe3.&lt;br /&gt;
===Deleting accounts===&lt;br /&gt;
If the &#039;&#039;&#039;deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; field is present, users with value 1 for it will be deleted. In this case, all the fields may be omitted, except for &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. After uploading the file, be sure to change the &amp;quot;Upload type&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Update existing users only&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;Allow deletes&amp;quot; option to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; A similar field is available for &#039;&#039;&#039;suspended&#039;&#039;&#039;. This enables a user account to be temporarily disabled rather than completely removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deleting and uploading accounts could be done with a single CSV file. For example, the following file will add the user Tom Jones and delete the user reznort:&lt;br /&gt;
 username,firstname,lastname,deleted&lt;br /&gt;
 jonest,Tom,Jones,0&lt;br /&gt;
 reznort,,,1&lt;br /&gt;
==Encoding file format==&lt;br /&gt;
On the initial Upload user screen, you may select the file encoding format from a pull down list. These include UTF-8 (the default), ASCII, ISO-8859-1 to ISO-8859-11 or any one of over 36 formats.&lt;br /&gt;
==Hints==&lt;br /&gt;
===Spreadsheet===&lt;br /&gt;
If you use a spreadsheet program such as Excel to create your .csv file, check the resulting output in a text editor before you upload it. It is possible to get trailing commas on each line from an empty field if you have added and deleted columns of information prior to saving the final file. Also check the character encoding. A csv file is a simple text file (ASCII or Unicode) that can be used to upload user accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excel translates passwords that begin with - (minus) or + (plus) as zero. Even when saving as .csv and saying &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Keep this format, and leave out any incompatible features.&amp;quot; Check for this before uploading, as a zero halts the upload process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use a formula in Excel to create fields (for example, the concatenate function to create a user name), then remember to copy the cells with the formula and use special paste with values checked to make them into an acceptable data for a csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The upload will also fail if you have trailing spaces at the end of your data fields. Often, this can not be removed with a simple Find &amp;quot; &amp;quot; and Replace with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;. If information has been copied from web sources than it is possible to include non-breaking spaces which will prevent your upload from being completed correctly. To find these invisible spaces, use the Find and Replace function in Excel. In the find field, hold alt and type 0160. Leave the replace field blank. &lt;br /&gt;
===Field size limits===&lt;br /&gt;
Some fields have maximum character lengths, as defined in the database fields. Typically the file will import to the preview list screen but not finish the process. Turn on debug to see the fields that are too long. The error will be &amp;quot;User not added - error&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sizes of some common fields, in number of characters, are currently (3.2):&lt;br /&gt;
*username - 100 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*password - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*idnumber - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*firstname - 100 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*lastname - 100 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*lastnamephonetic - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*firstnamephonetic - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*middlename - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*alternatename - 255 &lt;br /&gt;
*institution - 255&lt;br /&gt;
*department - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*address - 255 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*city - 120 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*icq -15 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*skype - 50 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*yahoo - 50 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*aim - 50&lt;br /&gt;
*msn - 50 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*phone1 - 20 	 &lt;br /&gt;
*phone2 - 20&lt;br /&gt;
===All user fields listed here===&lt;br /&gt;
:All the user fields that are valid in an upload file are listed below, except for any custom fields you may have created (for which see below.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;firstname,lastname,username,email,password,auth,idnumber,institution,department,city,country,timezone,lang,mailformat,maildisplay,maildigest,htmleditor,autosubscribe,profile_field_skype,msn,aim,yahoo,icq,phone1,phone2,address,url,description,descriptionformat,interests,oldusername,deleted,suspended,alternatename,lastnamephonetic,firstnamephonetic,middlename&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The enrolments into courses information are &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;course1,type1,role1,group1,enrolperiod1,enrolstatus1&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where each enrolment is grouped by number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Capabilities===&lt;br /&gt;
You may wish to create a limited role to allow some users access to this function. Create a role at the system/site level with the following capabilities allowed:&lt;br /&gt;
* moodle/site:uploadusers&lt;br /&gt;
* moodle/role:assign&lt;br /&gt;
And &lt;br /&gt;
* In &#039;Allow role assignments&#039; tab of this new role, permit it to assign the required roles that it may be uploading, especially Student, but also Teacher, Non-editing Teacher, and any other custom roles you may have created, which will be used in the uploads to assign users to.&lt;br /&gt;
In particular, don&#039;t forget the moodle/role:assign capability (even if these users have it in the courses they will be enrolling users in - it won&#039;t work).&lt;br /&gt;
==Upload users via CLI==&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.10 onwards, an administrator can upload users via a CLI script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To obtain instructions on how to use the script, in the command line from the moodle directory run &lt;br /&gt;
 php admin/tool/uploaduser/cli/uploaduser.php --help&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Flat file]] enrolment&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User profile fields]] for details of how to include data about custom user profile fields in the upload users file&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upload courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
Forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=97903 Uploading users to custom roles]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=144569 Matriculacion con flat file csv] - discussion in Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des utilisateurs]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:ユーザのアップロード]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Nutzerliste hochladen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Subir usuarios]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:uploaduserscatroles.png&amp;diff=148067</id>
		<title>File:uploaduserscatroles.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:uploaduserscatroles.png&amp;diff=148067"/>
		<updated>2024-03-19T10:39:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Example upload file category users&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148066</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148066"/>
		<updated>2024-03-19T10:34:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role and that the capability [[Capabilities/enrol/category:synchronised|enrol/category:synchronised]] is set to Allow - both from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable Category enrolments from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number (and if not, add one) and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categoryid.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv. &lt;br /&gt;
**For existing users, just include  &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. For new users, include their other essential details as in [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;category1&#039;&#039;&#039; where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category.&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;categoryrole1&#039;&#039;&#039; and use the shortname  &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
** Repeat these for  any other categories, using category2, categoryrole2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
**Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148060</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148060"/>
		<updated>2024-03-17T14:34:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role and that the capability [[Capabilities/enrol/category:synchronised|enrol/category:synchronised]] is set to Allow - both from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable Category enrolments from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number (and if not, add one) and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categoryid.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv. &lt;br /&gt;
**For existing users, just include  &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. For new users, include their other essential details as in [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;category1&#039;&#039;&#039; where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category.&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;categoryrole1&#039;&#039;&#039; and use the shortname  &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
** Repeat these for  any other categories, using category2, categoryrole 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
**Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148059</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148059"/>
		<updated>2024-03-17T14:32:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role and that enrol/category:synchronised is set to Allow - both from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable Category enrolments from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number (and if not, add one) and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categoryid.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv. &lt;br /&gt;
**For existing users, just include  &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. For new users, include their other essential details as in [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;category1&#039;&#039;&#039; where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category.&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;categoryrole1&#039;&#039;&#039; and use the shortname  &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
** Repeat these for  any other categories, using category2, categoryrole 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
**Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148058</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148058"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T12:33:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: CAVEAT&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIP!! THIS IS AS YET UNCONFIRMED&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number (and if not, add one) and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categoryid.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv. &lt;br /&gt;
**For existing users, just include  &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. For new users, include their other essential details as in [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;category1&#039;&#039;&#039; where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category.&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;categoryrole1&#039;&#039;&#039; and use the shortname  &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
** Repeat these for  any other categories, using category2, categoryrole 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
**Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Teachers assigned at category level will be listed in &#039;&#039;Course navigation &amp;gt; Participants &amp;gt; Other users.&#039;&#039; However, if they also have a course role (such as Student) then their Teacher role will appear in the Participants list along with their course role (eg Student) and they will be displayed as the course teacher in the list of available courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148057</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148057"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T12:20:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number (and if not, add one) and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categoryid.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv. &lt;br /&gt;
**For existing users, just include  &#039;&#039;&#039;username&#039;&#039;&#039;. For new users, include their other essential details as in [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;category1&#039;&#039;&#039; where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category.&lt;br /&gt;
**Add the field &#039;&#039;&#039;categoryrole1&#039;&#039;&#039; and use the shortname  &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
** Repeat these for  any other categories, using category2, categoryrole 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
**Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Teachers assigned at category level will be listed in &#039;&#039;Course navigation &amp;gt; Participants &amp;gt; Other users.&#039;&#039; However, if they also have a course role (such as Student) then their Teacher role will appear in the Participants list along with their course role (eg Student) and they will be displayed as the course teacher in the list of available courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148056</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148056"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T12:11:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number (and if not, add one) and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:categoryid.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv using the fields: username,category1, categoryrole1 - where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category and categoryrole1 says &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;. Repeat for any other categories, using category2, categoryrole 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Teachers assigned at category level will appear in the &#039;Others&#039; list in a course from Course navigation &amp;gt; Participants &amp;gt; Enrolled users &amp;gt; Other. However, if they also have a course role (such as Student) then their Teacher role will appear in the Participants list along with the Student role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:categoryid.png&amp;diff=148055</id>
		<title>File:categoryid.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=File:categoryid.png&amp;diff=148055"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T12:09:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148054</id>
		<title>Teacher role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Teacher_role&amp;diff=148054"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T12:06:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: bulk uploading teacher role&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Standard roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can do almost anything within a course, including adding or changing the activities and grading students. By default, teachers can also assign a [[Non-editing teacher role]] and a [[Student role]] to other users. (To allow teachers to enrol other teachers, see [[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default users are not assigned the role of Teacher throughout the site, but are only assigned (enrolled) as a teacher to a single course/class at a time. The same applies to students. Teachers can only teach in the courses they have been enrolled in. (If you really need your teacher to access all courses, see #13 of [[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning a user the role of teacher in a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# As a manager or administrator, go to the Participants page in the course&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for the teacher and select Teacher as role to assign&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Enrol users&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users and will no longer be available in the search list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on manually enrolling teachers, see [[Manual enrolment]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing Teacher Permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: if you need to modify the Teacher role significantly, it is advisable to create a new role rather than editing the default teacher role. See [[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you really need to change the default Teacher role,  go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles.&#039;&#039; In the right pane you will see Manage Roles with a list of user roles. To the right of the teacher description, click on the edit icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039; page you can change what a teacher can or cannot do by checking or unchecking the Allow check-boxes under Capability/Permission. Be careful what you allow a teacher to do here. Consider the security vulnerabilities of giving a teacher an inappropriate permission. Only give the teacher permissions that are necessary or appropriate. To the right of many of the Allow check boxes are colored triangles the notify you of possible security warnings for each choice. Use those warnings to help you decide which permissions you will or won&#039;t give to your teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning The Teacher role in a categorye==&lt;br /&gt;
As stated above, by default teachers are not given the role of teacher. However, under some conditions (such as for homeschool parents) you may want to assign a user, or some users, the role of teacher for all the courses in one category, or for all the courses in your whole site without having to enrol as a teacher for each class. If so, you can (If necessary, add a new role and) give that permission on this same &#039;&#039;Editing role &#039;Teacher&#039;&#039;&#039; page, under &#039;&#039;Role archetype&#039;&#039;. Under &#039;&#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039;&#039; check whichever apply.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Course&#039;&#039;: (Default setting-already checked) allows you to enrol a teacher to a specific course.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;: (Allows the user to be a teacher in any course contained in the specific category).If you click on the check-box for &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, it enables a user to access all the courses in a particular category or multiple categories (depending to which they are assigned). To assign a Teacher to a &#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;, navigate to that category, then use the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; menu to &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039;. (If you are not inside the category the &#039;&#039;Assign roles&#039;&#039; menu item will not show.) If you want one Teacher to apply to all the Course Categories, then navigate to every category and Assign roles for each category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give only some teachers these privileges, you may want to create another Teacher role that gives those permissions only to those trusted teachers who have been assigned that role.&lt;br /&gt;
===Bulk assigning the Teacher role in a category===&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the category context is checked for the Teacher role from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Define roles &amp;gt; Teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure your chosen category has an ID number and make a note of it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv using the fields: username,category1, categoryrole1 - where category1 is the ID number of the your chosen category and categoryrole1 says &amp;quot;editingteacher&amp;quot;. Repeat for any other categories, using category2, categoryrole 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload the file from Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Upload users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Teachers assigned at category level will appear in the &#039;Others&#039; list in a course from Course navigation &amp;gt; Participants &amp;gt; Enrolled users &amp;gt; Other. However, if they also have a course role (such as Student) then their Teacher role will appear in the Participants list along with the Student role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* For more information about why we use the label of &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; see the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=43024 Why &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=388219 How to reduce complexity for teachers in Moodle] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Irakaslea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Enseignant]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Docente]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:教師]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:教师]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Trainer-Rolle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rol de profesor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=148053</id>
		<title>Theme settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=148053"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T11:39:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change theme settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Themesettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme list===&lt;br /&gt;
This lists the themes available for course and user themes. Leave this blank to allow any valid theme to be used. If you want to shorten the theme menu, you may specify a comma-separated list of names, though don&#039;t use spaces (e.g. standard,orangewhite).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can preview the available themes in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Themes selector.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme designer mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn this on if you are designing and testing themes as it will stop the themes being cached and enable you to see theme changes quickly. (You can also do this with the Clear theme cache button on the theme selector page.)&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow user themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If the option &#039;&#039;allowuserthemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each user may select their preferred theme on the edit profile page. All Moodle pages will be displayed in the user&#039;s theme, apart from courses where a course theme has been set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the user&#039;s theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow course themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this, then teachers will be able to set their own course themes. Course themes override all other theme choices (site, user, or session themes).&lt;br /&gt;
*If the option &#039;&#039;allowcoursethemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each editing teacher may select their course theme via the Force theme option on the [[course/edit|Course settings]] page. The course will always be displayed in the theme specified in the course setting, with user and the site themes being overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the course theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow category themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, themes can be set at the category level. This will affect all child categories and courses unless they have specifically set their own theme. WARNING: Enabling category themes may affect performance, as it will result in a few extra DB queries on each page, so only turn this on if you need it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the category theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow cohort themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, cohort themes may be specified when editing or creating a cohort. See [[Cohort sync]].&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow theme changes in the URL===&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is checked then the theme may be changed by adding &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if there are other URL parameters) to the URL in the browser. &lt;br /&gt;
Theme names used as the URL parameter should be the shortname of the theme, which you can see in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; and scroll down to the Themes section near the bottom. Remove the &amp;quot;theme_&amp;quot; prefix to find the proper shortname. Theme shortnames are usually the same as the main theme name, e.g. Clean is &#039;clean&#039;, so your URL parameter for it will be: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=clean&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Shortnames are always lower case. Themes with multiple words are usually the same but spaces are replaced by underscores, for example the theme &amp;quot;Formal white&amp;quot; should be entered as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=formal_white&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:themeshortnames.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; You can turn this on to aid in troubleshooting problems that may be theme related. This will allow you to switch to a standard or different theme for your own session without affecting other users or the site theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: [[Allow theme change by URL#Notes|Allow theme change by URL]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow users to hide blocks===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to display and hide blocks&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow blocks to use the docks===&lt;br /&gt;
*If the theme allows it, then checking this will allow the user to move blocks to the side dock.&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The [[Boost theme]] does not support submenus in the custom menu setting.}}&lt;br /&gt;
The custommenuitems setting allows you to create a drop down menu that can be displayed by themes that support it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to create the custom menu by entering custom menu items one per line into the setting. Each item is preceded by a number of hyphens (-), the number of hyphens determines the depth of the item. So items that are &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; preceded by a hyphen appear on the top level of the menu (always visible), items with a single hyphen appear on a drop down menu below the previous top level item, and items with two hyphens appear on a drop down menu below the previous first level item and so on - &#039;&#039;if the theme allows submenus.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of each item is constructed of up to three bits, each separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039;&#039; (Shift + \) character. The bits are &#039;&#039;&#039;label&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;url&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tooltip&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; label : This is the text that will be shown within the menu item. You must specify a label for every item on the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
; url : This is the URL that the user will be taken to it they click the menu item. This is optional, if not provided then the item will not link anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
; tooltip : If you provide a URL you can also choose to provide a tooltip for the link that is created with the URL. This is optional and if not set the label is used as the tooltip for the menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
The following is an example of how you would create a custom menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle community|http://moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle free support|http://moodle.org/support&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle development|http://moodle.org/development&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Tracker|http://tracker.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Docs|https://docs.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle News|http://moodle.org/news&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle company&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial hosting|http://moodle.com/hosting&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial support|http://moodle.com/support&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The custom menu does not escape characters within the label. If you want to use a special HTML character such as an ampersand you must escape it yourself within the label. e.g. use &amp;amp;amp;amp; instead of &amp;amp;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multilanguage support ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a language code (or a comma separated list of codes) as the 4th item of the line. The line will be then printed if and only if the user has currently selected the listed language. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 English only|http://moodle.com|English only item|en&lt;br /&gt;
 German only|http://moodle.de|Deutsch|de,de_du,de_kids&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding other attributes to the HTML ====&lt;br /&gt;
Other attributes, such as &#039;&#039;&#039;target&#039;&#039;&#039; can be added:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle Homepage|http://moodle.org&amp;quot; target=&amp;quot;_blank&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first quote closes the href attribute, allowing other attributes to be added. Do not add the closing quotation mark on the final attribute, it is added automatically by Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
===User menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
The customusermenuitems setting allows you to add or remove items from the user menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Three items, Dashboard, Profile and Log out are automatically created and can not be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other user menu items can be set in this area by removing them, reordering them, or adding custom ones. There are 6 default items:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
profile,moodle|/user/profile.php&lt;br /&gt;
grades,grades|/grade/report/mygrades.php&lt;br /&gt;
calendar,core_calendar|/calendar/view.php?view=month&lt;br /&gt;
messages,message|/message/index.php&lt;br /&gt;
privatefiles,moodle|/user/files.php&lt;br /&gt;
reports,core_reportbuilder|/reportbuilder/index.php&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The format for each is the | &amp;quot;pipe&amp;quot; character delineating three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
# a string in &amp;quot;langstringname, componentname&amp;quot; form or as plain text &lt;br /&gt;
# a URL&lt;br /&gt;
Notes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) You can refer to a language string in the users language pack by its string name. For example, in the third line above for the default settings, &amp;quot;preferences&amp;quot; is the name of the language string, and &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot; is the language file it is located in. See Language customisation for more information. If you put a text here instead of a reference to a language string, that text will always show up and not be language specific.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) The examples are to php files inside the Moodle site, so &amp;quot;/message/index.php&amp;quot; is the path on the current Moodle instance. You could also put a path or URL here to files outside of Moodle as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom item example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Help Center|/course/view.php?id=2&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This will add item called &amp;quot;Help Center&amp;quot; which links to a course on the same site with id=2 which has been set up as a help center for all users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:usermenueg.png|alt=Custom menu item added to usermenu|center|Custom menu item added to usermenu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
A page theme is for special page-only themes set by code, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$PAGE-&amp;gt;force_theme()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme hierarchy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the usual order that themes are considered by the Moodle interface.&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border:1px dashed #ddd&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;text-align:left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Theme type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Overwrites&lt;br /&gt;
!Display&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Setting type&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Site&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;| - &lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in theme profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site theme&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in user profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site, user and session themes&lt;br /&gt;
|one course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in course profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Session&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site and user themes&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|temporary until logout&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
(* except courses with the course theme set)&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change default hierarchy===&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of themes can be set via the /moodle/config.php file. The order defines which theme wins when there are several set at different levels. You can set a variable called $CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder (see config-dist.php for more details). By default is set in the file /lib/pagelib.php to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder = array(&#039;course&#039;, &#039;category&#039;, &#039;session&#039;, &#039;user&#039;, &#039;cohort&#039;, &#039;site&#039;);&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Particular theme settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Each theme in Moodle will have its individual menu and setting area in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; &#039;&#039; Name of theme. Themes can vary greatly in how they organize their own settings, so menus here may look very different from theme to theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each theme should have all its settings in this location. Note, however, that some themes, especially child themes of Boost, may also use some common settings like the site Logos, set in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Logos &#039;&#039;instead of having their own logo settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuración de temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages des thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Design-Einstellungen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=148052</id>
		<title>Theme settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/403/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=148052"/>
		<updated>2024-03-16T11:37:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change theme settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Themesettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme list===&lt;br /&gt;
This lists the themes available for course and user themes. Leave this blank to allow any valid theme to be used. If you want to shorten the theme menu, you may specify a comma-separated list of names, though don&#039;t use spaces (e.g. standard,orangewhite).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can preview the available themes in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Themes selector.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme designer mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn this on if you are designing and testing themes as it will stop the themes being cached and enable you to see theme changes quickly. (You can also do this with the Clear theme cache button on the theme selector page.)&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow user themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If the option &#039;&#039;allowuserthemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each user may select their preferred theme on the edit profile page. All Moodle pages will be displayed in the user&#039;s theme, apart from courses where a course theme has been set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the user&#039;s theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow course themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this, then teachers will be able to set their own course themes. Course themes override all other theme choices (site, user, or session themes).&lt;br /&gt;
*If the option &#039;&#039;allowcoursethemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each editing teacher may select their course theme via the Force theme option on the [[course/edit|Course settings]] page. The course will always be displayed in the theme specified in the course setting, with user and the site themes being overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the course theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow category themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, themes can be set at the category level. This will affect all child categories and courses unless they have specifically set their own theme. WARNING: Enabling category themes may affect performance, as it will result in a few extra DB queries on each page, so only turn this on if you need it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the category theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow cohort themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, cohort themes may be specified when editing or creating a cohort. See [[Cohort sync]].&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow theme changes in the URL===&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is checked then the theme may be changed by adding &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if there are other URL parameters) to the URL in the browser. &lt;br /&gt;
Theme names used as the URL parameter should be the shortname of the theme, which you can see in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; and scroll down to the Themes section near the bottom. Remove the &amp;quot;theme_&amp;quot; prefix to find the proper shortname. Theme shortnames are usually the same as the main theme name, e.g. Clean is &#039;clean&#039;, so your URL parameter for it will be: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=clean&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Shortnames are always lower case. Themes with multiple words are usually the same but spaces are replaced by underscores, for example the theme &amp;quot;Formal white&amp;quot; should be entered as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=formal_white&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:themeshortnames.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; You can turn this on to aid in troubleshooting problems that may be theme related. This will allow you to switch to a standard or different theme for your own session without affecting other users or the site theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: [[Allow theme change by URL#Notes|Allow theme change by URL]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow users to hide blocks===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to display and hide blocks&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow blocks to use the docks===&lt;br /&gt;
*If the theme allows it, then checking this will allow the user to move blocks to the side dock.&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The [[Boost theme]] does not support submenus in the custom menu setting.}}&lt;br /&gt;
The custommenuitems setting allows you to create a drop down menu that can be displayed by themes that support it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to create the custom menu by entering custom menu items one per line into the setting. Each item is preceded by a number of hyphens (-), the number of hyphens determines the depth of the item. So items that are &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; preceded by a hyphen appear on the top level of the menu (always visible), items with a single hyphen appear on a drop down menu below the previous top level item, and items with two hyphens appear on a drop down menu below the previous first level item and so on - &#039;&#039;if the theme allows submenus.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of each item is constructed of up to three bits, each separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039;&#039; (Shift + \) character. The bits are &#039;&#039;&#039;label&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;url&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tooltip&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; label : This is the text that will be shown within the menu item. You must specify a label for every item on the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
; url : This is the URL that the user will be taken to it they click the menu item. This is optional, if not provided then the item will not link anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
; tooltip : If you provide a URL you can also choose to provide a tooltip for the link that is created with the URL. This is optional and if not set the label is used as the tooltip for the menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
The following is an example of how you would create a custom menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle community|http://moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle free support|http://moodle.org/support&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle development|http://moodle.org/development&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Tracker|http://tracker.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Docs|https://docs.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle News|http://moodle.org/news&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle company&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial hosting|http://moodle.com/hosting&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial support|http://moodle.com/support&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The custom menu does not escape characters within the label. If you want to use a special HTML character such as an ampersand you must escape it yourself within the label. e.g. use &amp;amp;amp;amp; instead of &amp;amp;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multilanguage support ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a language code (or a comma separated list of codes) as the 4th item of the line. The line will be then printed if and only if the user has currently selected the listed language. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 English only|http://moodle.com|English only item|en&lt;br /&gt;
 German only|http://moodle.de|Deutsch|de,de_du,de_kids&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding other attributes to the HTML ====&lt;br /&gt;
Other attributes, such as &#039;&#039;&#039;target&#039;&#039;&#039; can be added:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle Homepage|http://moodle.org&amp;quot; target=&amp;quot;_blank&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first quote closes the href attribute, allowing other attributes to be added. Do not add the closing quotation mark on the final attribute, it is added automatically by Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
===User menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
The customusermenuitems setting allows you to add or remove items from the user menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Three items, Dashboard, Profile and Log out are automatically created and can not be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other user menu items can be set in this area by removing them, reordering them, or adding custom ones. There are 6 default items:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
profile,moodle|/user/profile.php&lt;br /&gt;
grades,grades|/grade/report/mygrades.php&lt;br /&gt;
calendar,core_calendar|/calendar/view.php?view=month&lt;br /&gt;
messages,message|/message/index.php&lt;br /&gt;
privatefiles,moodle|/user/files.php&lt;br /&gt;
reports,core_reportbuilder|/reportbuilder/index.php&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The format for each is the | &amp;quot;pipe&amp;quot; character delineating three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
# a string in &amp;quot;langstringname, componentname&amp;quot; form or as plain text &lt;br /&gt;
# a URL&lt;br /&gt;
Notes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) You can refer to a language string in the users language pack by its string name. For example, in the third line above for the default settings, &amp;quot;preferences&amp;quot; is the name of the language string, and &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot; is the language file it is located in. See Language customisation for more information. If you put a text here instead of a reference to a language string, that text will always show up and not be language specific.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) The examples are to php files inside the Moodle site, so &amp;quot;/message/index.php&amp;quot; is the path on the current Moodle instance. You could also put a path or URL here to files outside of Moodle as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom item example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Help Center|/course/view.php?id=2&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This will add item called &amp;quot;Help Center&amp;quot; which links to a course on the same site with id=2 which has been set up as a help center for all users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:usermenueg.png|alt=Custom menu item added to usermenu|center|Custom menu item added to usermenu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special themes==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Session themes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle offers an additional way to set a theme - the &#039;&#039;&#039;session theme&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is set with the URL and lasts until you log out. When you next login, the site/course/user themes are active again. This option is great for theme testing and works perfectly when you want to enable different themes for different situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can offer a special link for PDA users and integrate the session theme &#039;&#039;orangewhitepda&#039;&#039; in that link. Nobody needs to change any settings, you just click on that link. The session theme is called by the URL parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The whole URL without the session theme could look like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and with the parameter for the PDA theme like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a standard Moodle installation, session themes are not active. To activate them the administrator must add the parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;allowthemechangeonurl = true;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to the Moodle &#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039; file in the Moodle base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
A page theme is for special page-only themes set by code, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$PAGE-&amp;gt;force_theme()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme hierarchy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the usual order that themes are considered by the Moodle interface.&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border:1px dashed #ddd&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;text-align:left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Theme type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Overwrites&lt;br /&gt;
!Display&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Setting type&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Site&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;| - &lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in theme profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site theme&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in user profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site, user and session themes&lt;br /&gt;
|one course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in course profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Session&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site and user themes&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|temporary until logout&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
(* except courses with the course theme set)&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change default hierarchy===&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of themes can be set via the /moodle/config.php file. The order defines which theme wins when there are several set at different levels. You can set a variable called $CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder (see config-dist.php for more details). By default is set in the file /lib/pagelib.php to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder = array(&#039;course&#039;, &#039;category&#039;, &#039;session&#039;, &#039;user&#039;, &#039;cohort&#039;, &#039;site&#039;);&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Particular theme settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Each theme in Moodle will have its individual menu and setting area in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; &#039;&#039; Name of theme. Themes can vary greatly in how they organize their own settings, so menus here may look very different from theme to theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each theme should have all its settings in this location. Note, however, that some themes, especially child themes of Boost, may also use some common settings like the site Logos, set in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Logos &#039;&#039;instead of having their own logo settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuración de temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages des thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Design-Einstellungen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>